Honda 2013 Crosstour Owners Manual

Honda-2013-Crosstour-Unlinked-Owners-Manual-106992 honda-2013-crosstour-unlinked-owners-manual-106992

Owners Manual Pdf P61313 2013 Honda Crosstour Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

2015-10-23

: Honda Honda-2013-Honda-Crosstour-Owners-Manual-816784 honda-2013-honda-crosstour-owners-manual-816784 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 571

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2013 Crosstour
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)

This document may not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

P/N 00X31-TP6-6301
Revised 10/13

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

0 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.

2 Safe Driving P. 27
For Safe Driving P. 28

Seat Belts P. 32

Airbags P. 39

2 Instrument Panel P. 69
Indicators P. 70

Gauges and Displays P. 83

2 Controls P. 87
Setting the Clock P. 88
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 91
Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 113
Adjusting the Seats P. 133
Climate Control System * P. 157

2 Features P. 163
Audio System P. 164
Audio System Basic Operation P. 169, 182, 215
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 318
Customized Features * P. 281

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
2 Driving P. 409

The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.

Before Driving P. 410
Towing a Trailer P. 415
Parking Your Vehicle P. 453 Rearview Camera P. 454

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 455

2 Maintenance P. 461
Before Performing Maintenance P. 462
Maintenance Minder™ P. 465
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 493
Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 509

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 515
Tools P. 516
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 517
Overheating P. 532
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 534
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 543

2 Information P. 545
Specifications P. 546
Emissions Testing P. 553

Identification Numbers P. 550
Warranty Coverages P. 555

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

1 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 54

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 105 Security System P. 107
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 114
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 142

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 110
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 130
Heating and Cooling System * P. 154

Audio Error Messages P. 268
General Information on the Audio System P. 276
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 320, 332, 367
Compass * P. 405, 407

When Driving P. 420
Refueling P. 456

Braking P. 449
Fuel Economy P. 459

Accessories and Modifications P. 460

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 469
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 497
Cleaning P. 510

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 484
Battery P. 506

Remote Transmitter Care P. 507

Engine Does Not Start P. 525
Jump Starting P. 528
Fuses P. 538
Emergency Towing P. 542
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 544
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 551
Authorized Manuals P. 557

Reporting Safety Defects P. 552
Customer Service Information P. 558

P. 2

Safety Labels P. 67

Safe Driving

P. 27

Instrument Panel

P. 69

Controls

P. 87

Features

P. 163

Driving

P. 409

Maintenance

P. 461

Handling the Unexpected

P. 515

Information

P. 545

Index

P. 562

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 531

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

2 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ System Indicators (P 70)
❙ Gauges (P 83)
❙ Information Display * (P 84)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 115)
❙ Audio System (P 169, 182, 215)
❙ Audio/Information Screen (P 186, 218)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual

❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 126)
❙ Heated Mirror Button (P 126)
❙ Heating and Cooling System * (P 154)
❙ Climate Control System * (P 157)
❙ Audio with Touch Screen * (P 183, 216)
❙ Ignition Switch*1 (P 114)
❙ Seat Heater Switches * (P 153)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 129)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 443)
❙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button * (P 440)
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

3 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

❙

(Display) Button * (P 186, 218)

❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down) * (P 431)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) * (P 431)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 84)
❙ Brightness Control (P 125)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 119)
❙ Fog Lights (P 122)
❙ Lane WatchTM* (P 444)

❙ Wipers/Washers (P 123)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P 432)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
(P224) See Navigation System Manual

❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P 320, 332, 367)

❙ SOURCE Button (P 168)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons (P 168)

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

4 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Power Window Switches (P 110)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 99)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 131)

❙ Rearview Mirror (P 130)
❙ Driver’s Front Airbag (P 42)
❙ Passenger’s Front Airbag
(P 42)

❙ Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission
(P 425, 426, 428)

❙ Interior Fuse Box
(Passenger’s side) (P 539)
❙ Glove Box (P 144)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P 147)

❙ Parking Brake (P 449)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 471)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (Driver’s side) (P 539)
4

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

5 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Cargo Area Light (P 143)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 61)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 62)
❙ Ceiling Light (P 142)
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 49)
❙ Seat Belts (P 32)
❙ Moonroof Switch (P113 )
❙ Map Lights (P 143)
❙ Sunglasses Holder (P 152)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ Accessory Power Socket (P 147)
❙ USB Adapter Cable (P 165)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P 165)
❙ Center Pocket * (P 152)
❙ Accessory Power Socket (P 147)
❙ Front Seat (P 133)
❙ Side Airbags (P 46)

❙ Coat Hook (P 148)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Rear Seat (P 139)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)
❙ Accessory Power Socket (P 148)

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

6 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 469)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 123, 493)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 131)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 94)
❙ Headlights (P 119, 484)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P 119, 489)
❙ Side Marker Lights (P 119, 488)
❙ Tires (P 497, 517)
❙ Fog Lights (P 122, 486)
❙ How to Refuel (P 457)
❙ Rear Wiper (P 124, 495)
❙ Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P 105)
❙ Tailgate Release Button (P 106)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 492)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 455)
❙ Rearview Camera (P 454)
❙ Rear License Plate Lights (P 492)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 490)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 490)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 490)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P 490)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

7 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Safe Driving

(P 27)

● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 54)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Quick Reference Guide

Airbags (P 39)

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 66)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 32)

Before Driving Checklist (P 31)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.

● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

8 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Instrument Panel

(P 69)

Quick Reference Guide

Gauges (P 83)/Information Display (P 84)/System Indicators (P 70)
System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp

System Indicators

Shift Lever Position Indicator
Tachometer

Speedometer

Door and Tailgate
Open Indicator

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

Charging System
Indicator

Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator *

Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Economy Fuel
Indicator *
Immobilizer System
Indicator
U.S.

Canada

Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Smart Entry System
Indicator *

U.S.

Canada

Starter System
Indicator *

Low Fuel Indicator
Security System Alarm
Indicator
Temperature Gauge

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator

Fuel Gauge

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

M (Sequential shift mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator *
U.S.

System Indicators
Daytime Running
Lights Indicator
TPMS Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) Indicator *
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Indicator *

Lights Reminders
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Side Airbag Off
Indicator

Canada

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Washer Level
Indicator *

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

Controls

9 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

(P 87)
Audio system without touch screen

Models without navigation system
Audio system with touch screen

Press the DISP button, then select Info
Settings.

Select Clock Adjustment.
2 (P88)

Rotate
.

to change hour, then press

Rotate
press
.

to change minute, then

These indicators are used to show how to
operate the selector knob or the MENU/SEL
(Menu/Selector) knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.

Press the CLOCK button until you hear
a beep. The displayed time begins
flashing.

Press the (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute)
button to set the time. Press the (6
(Reset) button to set the time to the
nearest hour.

Press the CLOCK button again to set
the time.

Quick Reference Guide

Clock (P88 )

Models with navigation system

The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

10 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

ENGINE START/STOP
Button * (P115 )

Turn Signals (P119)
Turn Signal Control Lever

Quick Reference Guide

Right

(P123)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
: Long Delay
: Short Delay

Left

Lights (P119)
Light Control Switches
High Beam
Low Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

11 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Power Door Mirrors

● To adjust, push the adjustment lever
down, adjust to the desired position, then
lock the lever back in place.

(P131)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

Power Windows (P110)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button

Tailgate (P105)
Adjustment Switch

Indicator

Quick Reference Guide

Steering Wheel (P129)

Window
Switch

● With all the doors unlocked, push the
tailgate release button on the tailgate to
open it.
Models with smart entry system

● Touch the tailgate release button to
unlock and open the tailgate.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

12 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Heating and Cooling System * (P154)
Quick Reference Guide

●
●
●
●
●
●

Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed and airflow.
Press the Mode buttons (
/
/
/
) to select the vents air flows from.
Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
Use the
button for maximum cool setting.
Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
Press the
button to defrost the windshield.

Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Button

(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror) Button
Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Button
Mode Buttons
Air flows from dashboard vents,
and back of the center console.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents, and back of the
center console.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

13 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Climate Control System * (P157)
Models with audio touch screen

MODE Control Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button

(On/Off) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button
(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror)
Button

Quick Reference Guide

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.

AUTO Button
(Recirculation) Button

/
Buttons

(Fan Control)

Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Switch

Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Air flows from dashboard vents and
back of the center console.
Air flows from floor and dashboard
vents, and back of the center console.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and windshield
defroster vents.

Models with navigation system

The climate control system is voice operable. (P 226)

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

14 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Models without audio touch screen

Quick Reference Guide

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
/

(Fan Control) Buttons
(Windshield Defroster) Button

SYNC (Synchronized) Button

Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Switch

Passenger’s Side Temperature
Control Switch

AUTO Button

(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror) Button

(On/Off) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(Recirculation) Button

MODE Control Button
Air flows from dashboard vents,
and back of the center console.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents, and back of the
center console.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

15 ページ

Features

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

(P 163)

Audio System (P169, 182, 215)
Audio system without touch screen (P169)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio Remote Controls
(P 168)
(+ / (- /

Button

SOURCE
Button
● (+ / (- Button
Press and release to adjust the volume up/
down.
● SOURCE Button
Press and release to change the audio
mode: FM/AM/CD/XM® */HDD */USB/iPod®/
Bluetooth/Pandora® */AhaTM*/AUX.
●
/
Button
Radio:Press and release to change the
preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/HDD */USB device:
Press and release to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.

VOL/PWR
(Volume/Power)
Knob

CD Slot

CD Button

AUX Button

AM Button

TITLE Button

LOAD Button

Preset Buttons
(1-6)

FM Button
SCAN Button

(CD Eject)
Button
A.SEL (Auto Select)
Button
/

(Skip)

Bar
FOLDER Bar

MENU Button

RETURN Button

Selector Knob

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

16 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Models without navigation system
Audio system with touch screen (P 182)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

Touch Screen
Button
Source*1

CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Clock/Screen*1
DISP Button

(Tune Down) Icon*1
VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

(Tune Up) Icon*1
MENU/SEL (Menu/Selector)
Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
BACK Button

Presets*1

*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

More*1

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

17 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Models with navigation system (P 215)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

Touch Screen

Source*1
CD Slot

(Power) Button

(Tune Down) Icon*1

(CD Eject) Button

(Tune Up) Icon*1

VOL (Volume) Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

Presets*1

More*1

PHONE Button

INFO Button

NAV Button

AUDIO Button

BACK Button

MENU Button

Button

SETTINGS Button
Interface Dial/ENTER Button

*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

Driving

18 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

(P409)

Quick Reference Guide

Automatic Transmission (P426, 428)

Paddle Shifters (P431)

● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Shifting
Depress the brake pedal and
press the release button to
move out of (P .
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.

Models without
paddle shifter

Models with
paddle shifter

Press the release button to move
the shift lever.

● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a
manual transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for
engine braking.
● D-paddle shift mode: The transmission will shift back to
automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle
is cruising.
● Sequential shift mode: Holds the selected gear, and the M
indicator comes on.
● The selected gear position is shown in the instrument
panel.
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
M Indicator

Shift Lever

Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Used when reversing.

Release Button

Models without paddle shifter

Neutral
Transmission is not locked.

Drive (D3)
Used when:
•Going up or down hills
•Towing a trailer in hilly terrain

Drive
Normal driving.
On models with paddle shifter,
D-paddle shift mode can be used.

Second
Used to increase engine braking (the
transmission is locked in 2nd gear)

Models with paddle shifter

S Position
Sequential shift mode can be used.

Selected Gear
Number

First
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

19 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

VSA® OFF Button (P 443)

Refueling (P 456)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 L)

Unlock the driver’s door.

Press on the edge of the
fuel fill door to make it
pop up slightly.

Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.

Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.

After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.

Cruise Control (P 432)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press –/SET once you have
received the desired speed (above 25 mph
or 40 km/h).

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 446)
● TPMS monitors tire pressure.
● TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.

Quick Reference Guide

● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

20 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Maintenance
Quick Reference Guide

Under the Hood (P 469)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the battery regularly.

Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.

Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.

c
20

(P 461)

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.

Wiper Blades (P 493)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.

Tires (P 497)

Lights (P 484)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

21 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Handling the Unexpected

(P 515)

Engine Won’t Start
(P 525)

Indicators Come On

Blown Fuse (P 538)

Emergency Towing

(P 534)

● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.

(P 542)

● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.

● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.

Overheating (P 532)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.

Quick Reference Guide

Flat Tire (P 517)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
cargo area.

● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

22 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

What to Do If
Quick Reference Guide

The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q *1.
Why?

●
●

●

The steering wheel may be locked.
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key *.
Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button * at
the same time.

The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 *1
and I cannot remove the
key. Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P .

Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.

The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

23 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?

The beeper sounds when:
● The key is left in the ignition switch *.
● The power mode * is in ACCESSORY.
● The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when:
● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
● The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

Quick Reference Guide

Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

Quick Reference Guide

24 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Event Data Recorders

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

25 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.

Quick Reference Guide

A Few Words About Safety

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

26 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

27 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 28
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 30
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 32
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 35
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 39
Types of Airbags ................................ 42
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42
Side Airbags....................................... 46

Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 49
Airbag System Indicators.................... 50
Airbag Care ....................................... 53
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 54
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......56

Safety of Larger Children ................... 64
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 66
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 67

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

28 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

29 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

Safe Driving

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

30 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
9

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.

6
10
7
8
10

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners
Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

31 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

■ Safety CheckList

If the door and tailgate open indicator is on, a door
and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all
doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator P. 74

Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.

1Safety CheckList

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 99

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 133

• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 136

• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35

• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 54

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

32 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers

■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 61

1About Your Seat Belts

3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

33 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Seat Belt Reminder

1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.

Safe Driving

■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

1Seat Belt Reminder

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
before the driver’s seat belt is fastened, a
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.

The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

34 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

35 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 133

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

Correct
Seated
Posture.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.

Safe Driving

Pull out slowly.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.

Latch
Plate

Buckle

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

36 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

Lap belt
as low as
possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Push

1Fastening a Seat Belt

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

37 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

38 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Safe Driving

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

39 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Airbags
Airbag System Components

11 12

Safe Driving

6
8
8

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

40 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:

d An electronic control unit that continually

monitors and records information about
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.

a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.

front seat belt tensioners. The
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.

side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

c Two

side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side
collision.

i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.

e Automatic

fA
b Two

h Impact

driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.

g Weight

sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).

j Sensors

that can detect if a child or small
statured adult is in the deployment path
of the front passenger’s side airbag.

k An indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
l An indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you that the front passenger’s side
airbag has been turned off.
m Safing

Sensor

rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

41 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

■ Important Facts About Your Airbags

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.

Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

42 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

1Types of Airbags

Front Airbags (SRS)

1Front Airbags (SRS)

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.

■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

43 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

44 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ When front airbags should not deploy

Safe Driving

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

45 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor

If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.

Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.

Safe Driving

Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.

Although we recommends against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger’s front airbag.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

46 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate to severe side impact.
Safe Driving

■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location

■ Operation
When
inflated

Side
Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

1Side Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the airbag
may not deploy when there is no passenger in the
front passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

47 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

Continued

Safe Driving

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

48 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ Side Airbag Cutoff System
Safe Driving

To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side
airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:
• The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front
passenger seat.
• The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the
deployment path of the side airbag.
When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes
on.
2 Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 52

■ Side Airbag Off Indicator
If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few
seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be
turned on, and the indicator will go off.
If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit
properly restrained in a rear seat.

1Side Airbag Cutoff System
Sensor that
monitor the
passenger’s height.

Sensor that monitor the
passenger’s position.
The sensors that monitor the front passenger’s height
and body position may not work if:
• The seat-back is wet
• The passenger is touching a metal or other
electrical conductive object
• A seat cushion is on the seat
• The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

49 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.

1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side will deploy, and
the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are
no passengers on that side of the vehicle.

Safe Driving

Side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.

To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

50 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

Safe Driving

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.

■ SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

51 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

U.S. Canada

■ When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.

If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors. Such as:

• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.

Safe Driving

Models with audio
touch screen

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger’s seat.

• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against

Models without audio
touch screen

an object on the seat or floor behind it.

• An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

U.S. Canada

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.

Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 54

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

52 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Side Airbag Off Indicator

1Side Airbag Off Indicator

■ When the side airbag off indicator comes on
Safe Driving

U.S.

Canada

This indicator comes on if the passenger’s side
airbag has been turned off because the
passenger is too small to be sitting in the front
seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has
leaned into the airbag’s deployment path.
Unless the passenger is a smaller statured
adult or a child, the indicator should go off
when the passenger returns to a proper
upright sitting position.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, the
indicator should come on for a few seconds and then
go out. If it doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in the front seat,
have the system checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

53 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

1Airbag Care

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

54 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
Safe Driving

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Canada recommend
that all children age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/
territories have laws restricting where children may
ride.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

55 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.

Safe Driving

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 67

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

56 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants
Safe Driving

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.

1Protecting Infants

3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 39

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

57 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.

Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Continued

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

58 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Selecting a Child Seat
Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

59 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Lower Anchors

Rigid Type

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

60 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Safe Driving

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Flexible Type
Tether Strap Hook

Anchor
Anchor Cover

3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
seat-back.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

61 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

62 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

■ Adding Security with a Tether
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.

Tether Anchorage Points

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

63 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Outer Position

Tether Strap Hook

Center Position
Cover

Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor

Safe Driving

Cover
Anchor

■ Using an outer anchor
1. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■ Using the center anchor
1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

64 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
Safe Driving

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.

■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

65 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

■ Booster Seats

1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

66 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system */climate control
system * as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating and cooling system */climate control system * in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

* Not available on all models

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

67 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

Sun Visor
U.S. models

Safe Driving

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.

Canadian models

Dashboard
U.S. models only

Doorjambs
U.S. models

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

68 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

69 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 70
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 82
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 83
Information Display............................ 84

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

70 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Indicators

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

U.S.
Instrument Panel

Canada

●

Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)

●

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is
low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
brake system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if you drive with the parking
brake not fully released.

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is
low.

●

Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking
brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on while
driving P. 536

●

Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have
the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
P. 536

Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe
place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 534

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

71 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Charging System
Indicator

●

Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, and goes off either when the
engine starts or after several seconds if the
engine is not started. If “readiness codes”
have not been set, it blinks five times before it
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s cylinders
is detected.

●

Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics
for the emissions control systems.

●

Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where
there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for
10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine
starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.

●

Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are
not wearing a seat belt when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt,
the indicator comes on about six seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front
passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The
beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.

●

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 553

●

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks P. 535

Instrument Panel

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp

Explanation

Comes on while driving - Turn off the heating and
cooling system */climate control system * and rear
defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 534

●

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you
and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has
fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 33

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

72 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Explanation

Indicates in which position your shift lever is.

Shift Lever
Position
Indicator
Instrument Panel

M (sequential
shift mode)
Indicator/Gear
Position
Indicator *

2 Shifting P. 426, 428

●

2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 430

●

Transmission
Indicator

Comes on when the sequential shift mode is
applied.

●

Low Fuel
Indicator
●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Blinks if the transmission system has a
problem.

●

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and
acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running
low (approximately 2.5 U.S. gal./9.6 Liter
left on 2WD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal./10.5
Liter left on 4WD models).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel
gauge.

●

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

73 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
Indicator

On/Blinking
●

●

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

●

VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
System Indicator
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
OFF Indicator

●
●

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a
problem with the ABS.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the
following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA®
system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 451
Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System P. 442

2 VSA® On and Off P. 443

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

74 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

Door and Tailgate
Open Indicator

●

EPS (Electric
Power Steering)
System Indicator *

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if any door or the tailgate is not
completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes
on if any door or the tailgate is opened
while driving.

●

Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine
starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS
(Electric Power Steering) System.

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the EPS System Indicator Comes On P. 536

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

75 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

TPMS Indicator

●

Low Tire Pressure
Indicator

●

Fuel Economy
Indicator *

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is
fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the
tires becomes significantly low.
Comes on for a while and then goes off
when a compact spare tire is temporarily
installed.

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,
check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if
necessary.

Comes on while the engine is operating in its
most economical range.

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

76 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

●

Forward
Collision
Warning
(FCW)
Indicator *

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the FCW system.

●

Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Blinks when the system detects
a likely collision with a vehicle
in front of you. The beeper
sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to prevent
a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).

Comes on when the FCW
system shuts itself off.

●

Message

—

Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW system is too
high. The system activates when the temperature inside the
system cools down.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 437

●

Stays on - The radar sensor or the area around the camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if:
The indicator and message come back on after you cleaned
the area around the camera.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 437
2 Automatic shutoff P. 437

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

—

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

77 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the LDW system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Blinks when your vehicle is too close
to the lane lines. The beeper sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take
appropriate action to keep your vehicle
within the lane lines.

Comes on when the LDW system
shuts itself off.

●

Message

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

—

Stays on - The temperature inside the
LDW camera is too high.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
2 LDW Camera P. 440

●

Stays on - The area around the camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off
with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back
on after you cleaned the area around
the camera.
2 LDW Camera P. 440

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

78 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Smart Entry
System Indicator *
Instrument Panel

●

U.S.

Canada

●

Starter System
Indicator *

●

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

* Not available on all models

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you
change the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is detected
in the smart entry system or push button
starting system.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when you set
the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if the starting system has a
problem.

●

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 15 seconds while pressing
the brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have
the vehicle checked by a dealer.

The turn signal indicators blink when you
operate the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button, both
indicators and all turn signals blink at the
same time.

●

Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal
light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 489, 490

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

79 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
High Beam
Indicator

●

Comes on when the fog lights are on.

●

If you remove the key from the ignition switch or set
the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) while the exterior lights are on, a chime
sounds when the driver’s door is opened.
—

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the DRL
system.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on when the passenger side airbag
system is automatically shut off.

●

Instrument Panel

Canada

Side Airbag Off
Indicator

—

●

U.S.

Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or
in AUTO when the exterior lights are on.

●

Daytime Running
Lights Indicator

Explanation

●

Lights On
Indicator

Fog Light
Indicator

On/Blinking

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Daytime Running Lights P. 122

●

It does not mean there is a problem with your side
airbags.
Comes on when nobody is sitting in the
passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Comes on when someone is sitting in the seat Have the passenger sit properly.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

80 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

Immobilizer
System Indicator

●

Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot
recognize the key information.

Explanation
●

●

Security System
Alarm Indicator

Blinks when the security system alarm has
been set.

Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0 *1, pull the key out, and then insert
the key and turn it to ON (w *1 again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other
devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

2 Security System Alarm P. 107

Indicator

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

81 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator

Washer Level
Indicator *

●

Comes on when you press the CRUISE
button.

2 Cruise Control P. 432

Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise
control.

2 Cruise Control P. 432

Comes on when washer fluid gets low.

●

Refill washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 483

●

Maintenance
Minder Indicator

Explanation

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the scheduled maintenance
is due soon.

Instrument Panel

CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator

On/Blinking

2 Maintenance Minder™ P. 465

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

82 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message

Condition
●

Explanation

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2 Check Fuel Cap Message P. 535

Instrument Panel

Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition

Explanation

●

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button
to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .

●

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

●

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

●

Appears when you close the door with the power mode
in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

●

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.

●

Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery
becomes weak.

●

Replace the battery as soon as possible.

●

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P .

—

2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 507

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

83 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

1Fuel Gauge

Instrument Panel

■ Tachometer

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.

■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 532
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

84 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

Information Display
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

1Switching the Display
Each time you press the
knob, the information
display changes as follows:

■ Switching the Display
Press the

Odometer, Trip Meter A

(Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

Instrument Panel

Select/Reset
Knob
Outside Temperature*,
Trip Meter A

Outside Temperature*,
Trip Meter B

■ Odometer

Engine Oil Life

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the audio/information screen *. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

85 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

■ Trip Meter

1Trip Meter

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

knob. The trip meter is

■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance Minder™ P. 465

Instrument Panel

■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.

■ Check Fuel Cap
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2 Check Fuel Cap Message P. 535

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

86 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

■ Outside Temperature*
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Instrument Panel

Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press and hold the
(Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display.
uThe information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the
knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
uThe adjustment is complete.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road
heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the
temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less
than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Models with audio touch screen

Use the audio/information screen’s customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

87 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Setting the Clock ................................ 88
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................... 91
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength * .. 93
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ............................................ 94
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................... 99
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 100
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 101
Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 105
Security System ................................ 107
Immobilizer System .......................... 107
Security System Alarm...................... 107
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 110

* Not available on all models

Opening and Closing the Moonroof .. 113
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch * ............................... 114
ENGINE START/STOP Button * ........... 115
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 118
Turn Signals ..................................... 119
Light Switches.................................. 119
Fog Lights ........................................ 122
Daytime Running Lights ................... 122
Wipers and Washers ........................ 123
Brightness Control ........................... 125
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button..126
Driving Position Memory System * .... 127

Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 129
Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 130
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 130
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 131
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 133
Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 133
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 142
Interior Lights .................................. 142
Interior Convenience Items .............. 144
Heating and Cooling System * ......... 154
Using Vents, Heating and A/C.......... 154
Climate Control System * .................. 157
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 157
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 162

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

88 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Setting the Clock
Clock
Models without navigation system

1Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.

■ Adjusting the Time
Models with audio touch screen

■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

Controls

1. Press and hold the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Info Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock
Adjustment.
3. Rotate
to change hour, then press .
4. Rotate
to change minute, then press .

1. Select
.
2. Select Clock.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
3/4.
4. Select 12H or 24H.
5. Press Set to set the time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Models with audio touch screen

You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features * P. 281
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

■ Using the audio touch screen

Models without navigation system

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob or the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

89 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSetting the ClockuClock

Models without audio touch screen

1Clock

■ Using the MENU button

MENU Button

Hour Setting

6. Press
to enter your selection. The display
returns to CLOCK ADJUST. Repeat steps 4
to 6 to adjust other items.
7. To enter the selection, Rotate
and select
SET, then press .
8. Press the MENU button to go back to the
normal display.

You can switch the clock display between 24 hours
and 12 hours when in the menu mode.
Selector Knob Icon details
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
To set the time to the nearest hour:
Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock
display begins to blink, then press the (6 (Reset)
button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00

Controls

12/24 Hour Mode

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select CLOCK ADJUST in the
display.
3. Press . CLOCK ADJUST appears.
4. Rotate
to select the item you want to
adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute).
Then press .
5. Rotate
to make the adjustment.

Minute Setting

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

90 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSetting the ClockuClock

■ Using the CLOCK button
(6 Button
(5 Button
(4 Button

Controls

CLOCK Button

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until the
clock display begins to blink.
2. Press the (4 (Hour) button to change the
hours.
3. Press the (5 (Minute) button to change the
minutes.
4. Press the CLOCK button to go back to the
normal display.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

91 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:

1Key Types and Functions

■ Master Keys
Master Key *

Smart Entry
Remote *

Use the key to start and stop the engine, and
to lock and unlock the doors, tailgate, and
fuel fill door.

The seat automatically moves to the preset
position when you unlock the door using the
remote transmitter or smart entry system.
2 Driving Position Memory System * P. 127

■ Smart entry remote
Release Knob

Built-in Key

* Not available on all models

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors and tailgate when the smart entry
remote battery becomes weak and the power
door lock/unlock operation is disabled.

The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.

Controls

You can also use the remote transmitter or
smart entry system * to lock and unlock the
doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door.

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 107

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the builtin key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

92 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

■ Valet Key *
Gray

1Valet Key *

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver’s door.

Controls

■ Key Number Tag

When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.

1Key Number Tag

Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

93 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the
engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
Controls

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

94 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Remote Transmitter
■ Locking the doors

Lock Button
LED

Controls

Unlock Button

Press the lock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights will flash, all the
doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door will lock,
and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
uA beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.

1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
Models with audio touch screen

You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features * P. 281
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 142
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
Models without smart entry system

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
All models

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or
the tailgate is open.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

95 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 507
Models with audio touch screen

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features * P. 281
Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

96 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

Controls

When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors, the tailgate, and
the fuel fill door.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the tailgate within
about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the
tailgate release button.

■ Locking the vehicle

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

• The driver must carry the smart entry remote and
not leave it in the vehicle when you get out.

• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
•
•
•

Door Lock Button

Press the door lock button on the front door
or the tailgate.
uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors, tailgate and fuel fill
door lock; and the security system sets.

•

remote can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate
if a person who is carrying it is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle
after two seconds of locking it.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 507
Lock
Button

* Not available on all models

You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

97 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the vehicle

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

Grab the driver’s door handle:
uThe driver’s door unlocks.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
uAll the doors and the tailgate unlock.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate release button:
uThe trunk unlocks.
2 Using the Tailgate Release Button P. 106

* Not available on all models

Continued

not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart
entry remote if it is above or below the outside
handle.
• The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

Controls

Tailgate Release Button

• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

98 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.

Lock

When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the
same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door and
fuel fill door unlock first. Turn the key a second time
within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate.
Models with audio touch screen

Unlock
Controls

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
■ Locking the driver’s door
Pull the lock tab rearward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.

■ Locking the passenger’s doors
Pull the lock tab rearward and close the door.

■ Lockout prevention system
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch*1, or
the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

* Not available on all models

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors,
tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

99 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Using the Lock Tab
Lock Tab

Lock

1Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.

■ Unlocking a door
Push the lock tab forward.

Unlock

To Lock
To Unlock

Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

Controls

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all the other doors, tailgate, and fuel fill
door lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door and fuel fill door
will unlock.

When you lock/unlock either front door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors, tailgate,
and fuel fill door lock/unlock at the same time.

Master Door Lock Switch

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

100 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.

■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.

■ When opening the door
Controls

Unlock

Lock

100

Open the door using the outside door handle.

1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

101 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a
certain condition is met.

■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Models with audio/information screen

You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Models without audio/information screen

■ Auto Door Unlocking

* Not available on all models

Controls

■ Park unlock mode
The driver’s door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal
depressed.

You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
switch.
2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting * P. 102

101

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

102 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
■ Auto door locking
Mode

Description

Controls

Drive Lock Mode

All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reach about 10 mph (15 km/h).*1

Park Lock Mode

All doors lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Off

The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

■ Auto door unlocking
Mode

Description
Driver’s door unlocks*1/All doors unlock

Park UnLock Mode
When the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition Switch Unlock
Mode

Driver’s door unlocks/All doors unlock

Off

The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

*1:Default setting

102

* Not available on all models

When the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

103 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps

Drive Lock Mode

Park Lock Mode

Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P .

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .

The driver’s door must be closed at this stage.

Move the shift lever out of (P with the
brake pedal depressed.

Open the driver’s door.
—

Pull the lock tab rearward.

Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more Press and hold the front of the master
than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.
door lock switch on the driver’s door for
more than five seconds. Release the switch
after you hear one click.

Controls

Off

Move the shift lever to (P .

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within five seconds.
uCustomization is completed.

—

Continued

103

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

104 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Ignition Switch Unlock Mode

Park Unlock Mode

Steps

Off
To unlock driver’s door

To unlock all doors

To unlock driver’s door

Controls

Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P .

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .

The driver’s door must be closed at this stage.

Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal
depressed.

To unlock all doors

Open the driver’s door.
—

Press and hold the rear of the master door lock
switch on the driver’s door for more than five
seconds. You will hear a click twice.
5

Release the switch.
6

104

Keep pressing the switch Release the switch.
for another five seconds
to hear one more click.

Move the shift lever to (P .

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within five seconds.
uCustomization is completed.

Keep pressing the switch Release the switch.
for another five seconds
to hear one more click.
—

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

105 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Be careful not to put your hands between the tailgate
and the cargo area when closing the gate.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the
cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in
front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

■ Closing the tailgate

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

Controls

■ Opening the tailgate
• Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
• Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 66

105

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

106 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Button

Using the Tailgate Release Button
When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate
is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button
and lift open the tailgate.

1Using the Tailgate Release Button
Models with smart entry system

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

Models with smart entry system

Tailgate Release
Button
Controls

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.

Inner Handle

106

Even if the tailgate is locked, you can open the
tailgate if you carry the smart entry remote.

• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the tailgate if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
• Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper
sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

107 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.

Security System Alarm

NOTICE

Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.

Controls

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.

1Immobilizer System

1Security System Alarm

The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, or hood are opened
without the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.

■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry remote, or turn
the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights,
is deactivated.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

107

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

108 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and tailgate are closed.
• All doors are locked with the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.

Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master
door lock switch.

The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.

■ To cancel the security system alarm

Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.

■ When the security system alarm sets
Controls

The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key,
remote transmitter, or smart entry system, or the ignition switch is turned to ON
(w *1. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

108

1Security System Alarm

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

109 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.

■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

Controls

Panic Button

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

109

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

110 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open
and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed
in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the
driver’s seat.

Controls

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on when
children are in the vehicle.

■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch

Indicator
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch

■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.

■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

110

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

111 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open

To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.

Controls

■ Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down for the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.

Unlock Button

Continued

111

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

112 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key

Close
Open
Controls

112

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

113 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Opening and Closing the Moonroof
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then
release.
Open
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.

The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.

■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.

3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

Controls

Tilt

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

113

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

114 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch *
1Ignition Switch *
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .

position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.

Controls

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
the key.

114

* Not available on all models

If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

115 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

ENGINE START/STOP Button *
■ Changing the Power Mode

1ENGINE START/STOP Button *
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
Operating Range

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked. The
power to all electrical
components is turned off.

Indicator

Controls

ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.

You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.

ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be
used.

If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR
START BUTTON message appears on the
information display.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 526

Without pressing the brake pedal
Press the button.
Press the button without the shift lever in (P .
Shift to (P then press the button.

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.

* Not available on all models

Continued

115

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

116 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power
mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.

Controls

116

When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

* Not available on all models

1ENGINE START/STOP Button *
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

117 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
beep sounds.

■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder

■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the information display notifies the driver
inside that the remote is out.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.

Controls

Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.

117

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

118 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position

LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)

Without Smart Entry
System

●

Controls

Power Mode

Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical
components can be
used.

VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)

ACCESSORY (I)

●
●

Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.

ACCESSORY

ON (II)

●

START (III)

Normal key position
while driving.
All electrical components
can be used.

ON
Indicator is: On

●

Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.

START
Off

With Smart Entry
Indicator-Off
Indicator-On or blinking
IndicatorIndicator-Off
● The mode automatically
System and ENGINE ● Engine is turned off and ● Engine is turned off.
On (engine is turned off)
●
Some electrical
START/STOP
power is shut down.
Off (engine is running)
returns to ON after the
● The steering wheel is
components such as the ● All electrical components
Button
engine starts.
locked.
audio system and the
can be used.
● No electrical
accessory power socket
components can be
can be operated.
used.

118

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

119 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
Right Turn

The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.

Left Turn

■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.

Light Switches

1Light Switches

■ Manual Operation
High Beams

Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch*1.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.

Controls

This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.

If you remove the key from the ignition switch or
leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 79
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

119

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

120 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Lighting Control

1Automatic Lighting Control

Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.

The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.

Controls

Models with audio/information screen

Light Sensor

uYou can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

Models with audio/information screen

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

120

* Not available on all models

The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Bright

Dark

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

121 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Models without smart entry system

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver’s door.
Models with smart entry system

2 Customized Features * P. 281

Controls

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
within 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the
remote with you, and close the driver’s door.
uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

All models

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch
is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

121

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

122 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights

Fog Lights
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch
Controls

Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
• The headlight switch is off, or in
.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running
lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

122

1Fog Lights
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator P. 79

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

123 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
■ Front Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Pull to
use
washer.

MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe

NOTICE

■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.

■ Adjusting the delay

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
Long delay

HI: High speed wipe
Short delay

Controls

Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring

■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.

■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

123

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

124 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

■ Rear Wiper/Washer

1Rear Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Wiper switch (OFF, ON)
The wiper operates intermittently after
completing a few sweeps.
Controls

■ Washer (
ON: Continuous wipe
OFF
Washer

)
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.
Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.

■ Operating in reverse
When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper
operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
Front Wiper Position

Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent)

Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe)

Continuous

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

124

If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then
remove the obstacle.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal
within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to
normal.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

125 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
Control Knob

Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the
display.

(Select/Reset) knob switches the

If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
exterior lights are on.

Controls

You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The
information display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.

1Brightness Control

■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

125

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

126 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Models with heating and cooling system

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 20 minutes.
However, if the outside temperature is 18°F
(−8°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
Controls

Models with climate control system

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
Models with audio
touch screen

Models without
audio touch screen

126

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

127 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

Driving Position Memory System *
You can store two driver’s seat and door mirror positions with the driving position
memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat and door
mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two preset positions.

1Driving Position Memory System *
Models with audio/information screen

Using the audio/information screen, you can disable
the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

Select either remote you use to unlock the vehicle when you enter.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
DRIVER 2

Models with smart entry system

Controls

DRIVER 1

Models without smart entry system

* Not available on all models

Continued

127

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

128 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

■ Storing a Position in Memory
Memory
Button 1

Memory
Button 2

Controls

SET Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. Adjust
the driver’s seat and the door mirrors to the
desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
uYou will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
uOnce the seat and the door mirrors
position has been memorized, the
indicator light on the button you pressed
stays on.

■ Recalling the Stored Position
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2

1. Move the shift lever to (P .
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ).
uYou will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

128

1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
• You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
• You readjust the seat position before the doublebeep.
• You readjust the door mirrors.
• You turn the ignition switch to any position except
ON (w *1.

1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat and the door mirrors automatically move to
the memorized position. When they finish moving,
the beeper sounds, and the indicator light stays on.
The seat and the door mirrors stop moving if you:
• Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or
(2 ).
• Adjust the seat position.
• Adjust the door mirrors.
• Shift into any position except (P .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

129 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.

Controls

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
To adjust
down.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
Lever
To lock
3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up
to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

129

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

130 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you.

1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 133
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .

Controls
Indicator

130

Sensor

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

131 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors
Adjustment Switch

Selector
Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Reverse Tilt Door Mirror *

Controls

■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.

If activated, either side door mirror
automatically tilts downward when you put
the shift lever in (R ; this improves close-in
visibility on the selected side of the vehicle
when reversing. The mirror automatically
returns to its original position when you shift
out of (R .
Selector Switch

To activate this feature, turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, and slide the selector
switch to the left or right side.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

131

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

132 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

■ Expanded View Driver’s Mirror
Outer Segment

Controls

132

Inner Segment

The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.

1Expanded View Driver’s Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appears smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

133 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient
space.

Move back.

■ Adjusting the front power seat(s) *

1Adjusting the Seats

3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Controls

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Lumbar Support Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)

Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)

* Not available on all models

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Continued

133

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

134 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the front manual seat *

1Adjusting the front manual seat *
Horizontal Position Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the seat,
then release the bar.

Controls

134

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.

* Not available on all models

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

135 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Continued

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.

Controls

The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

3 WARNING

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

135

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

136 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.

Controls

Position head in the center
of the head restraint.

Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.

■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.

Release
Button

136

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active
head restraints.
2 Active Head Restraints P. 138

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

137 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

Controls

Release
Button

A passenger sitting in a back seating position
should adjust the height of their head restraint
to an appropriate position before the vehicle
begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

3 WARNING

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove the head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall the head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

Continued

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.

137

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

138 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.

Controls

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

■ Active Head Restraints

1Active Head Restraints

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have
active head restraints. In a rear impact, an
occupant properly secured by a seat belt will
be pushed against the seat-back and the head
restraint will move forward. This reduces the
distance between the restraint and the
occupant’s head, which helps reduce the
likelihood of whiplash and injuries to the neck
and upper spine.

138

In order for the active head restraints to operate
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
After a collision, the activated restraint should return
to its normal position. If the restraint does not return
to its normal position, or in the event of a severe
collision, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

139 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seats

1Folding Down the Rear Seats

Separately fold down the left and right halves of the rear seat to make room for
cargo.

■ To fold down the seat
1. Lower the rear head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the
seat-back.
From the rear door side

When you fold down one side of the rear seats and
use the non-recessed part of the cargo area, make
sure to secure the cargo. Loose items can fly forward
and cause injury if you have to brake hard.

Pull

Controls

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending to the rear seats are properly
secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have
to brake hard.

2. Pull the release lever.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 51

Release
Lever

Lever

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion before
you fold down the rear seat.

From the cargo area side

2. Pull the release lever.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.

2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 137

Continued

139

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

140 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

■ To return the seat to the original position
Pull up the seat-back in the upright position.

1To return the seat to the original position
Make sure the seat is latched before driving.

Controls

Red Indicator

You see the red indicator behind the release lever
when the seat-back is latched fully.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.
When returning a seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is positioned in the guide.

140

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

141 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest
■ Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
Slide the armrest to one of its three positions.

Controls

■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

141

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

142 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches
■ ON

Front

Off

Door Activated Position
Controls

Rear

1Interior Light Switches

Off

The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.
Models without smart entry system

• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
Models without smart entry system

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

Models with smart entry system

Door Activated Position

• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Only the cargo area light comes on when the
tailgate is opened.
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.

The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver’s door.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
Models without smart entry system

• When you close the driver’s door with the key in
the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition switch,
the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE
START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

142

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

143 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

■ Map Lights

1Map Lights

The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.

When the interior light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.

Controls

■ Cargo Area Lights
■ ON
The light comes on when you open the
tailgate, and goes off when closed.
On

Off

■ OFF
The light stays off with or without opening the
tailgate.

143

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

144 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items
■ Glove Box

1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box. You
can lock the glove box with the master key or
the built-in key.
To Lock

3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.

Controls

144

Glove Box

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

145 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.

■ Removable tray
The tray in the console compartment is
detachable.

Controls

Removable Tray

To remove this tray, slide it forward, then pull
it up.

Continued

145

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

146 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders

■ Front seat beverage holders

NOTICE

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

■ Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.

146

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

147 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w *1.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120
watts or less (10 amps).

■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

Controls

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
When each sockets is being used simultaneously, the
combined power rating of the accessories should not
exceed 120 watts (10 amps).

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

147

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

148 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory power socket (cargo area)
Open the cover to use it.

Controls

148

■ Coat Hook

1Coat Hook

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

149 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Cargo Hooks

1Cargo Hooks

Use floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in the
cargo area.

Hooks

Each hook is designed to hold up to 56.2 lbs (25.5 kg)
of weight.

There are also hooks on both sides of the
cargo area.

Controls

Hooks

Continued

149

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

150 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Under-floor Storage Area

1Under-floor Storage Area

Pull the handle to open the cargo floor lid.
The reverse side of the cargo floor lid is waterproofed. Flip the lid to use the water-proofed
side.

NOTICE

Do not put objects that weigh more than 22.1 lbs (10
kg) in the removable box. Exceeding the maximum
load may damage the box.
Do not leave water, soil, sand, or perishable foods in
the removable box. Rotting food and dirt on the floor
may cause the breakdown of electrical equipment.

Controls

■ To keep the lid open:
1. Remove the hook from the back of the
cargo floor lid.
2. Pull the hook to the hole on the side panel.

Strap

■ Removable box
The removable box is under the cargo floor.
To remove the box, lift it up with the straps on
both sides.

150

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

151 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Side Storage Compartments
Pull the strap to raise the lid.

The reverse side of each lid is water-proofed.
Flip the lids, then replace each other side.

Continued

Controls

Strap

151

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

152 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Sunglasses Holder
Push

1Sunglasses Holder

To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.

Controls

■ Center Pocket(s) *
Pull the lid to open the pocket.

152

* Not available on all models

Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

153 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Seat Heaters *

1Seat Heaters *

The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the passenger’s seatback due to the side airbag cutoff system.

Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.

Controls

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.

3 WARNING

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

153

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

154 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Heating and Cooling System *
Using Vents, Heating and A/C
Mode Buttons
Change airflow.

Floor and defroster vents
Floor vents
Dashboard, floor and back of the center console vents
Dashboard and back of the center console vents

Windshield Defroster Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from
the defroster vents at the base of the
windshield, and switches the mode to
fresh air.

Button
Controls

Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from the
dashboard and back of the center console vents,
and switches the mode to recirculation.

Temperature
Control Dial

Fan Control Dial
Adjusts the fan speed.
Rotate the dial all the
way to OFF to turn
everything off.

(Recirculation) Button
Press the
button and switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.

154

* Not available on all models

Adjusts the interior
temperature.

A/C Button
Press to cool the interior or
dehumidify while heating.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

155 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C

■ Heating

1Heating

The heater uses heat from the engine coolant
to warm the air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
.
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.

1To rapidly warm up the interior

Controls

■ To rapidly warm up the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select
.
3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
4. Press the
button (the indicator on).

When you select
, the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.

Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.

■ To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control dial.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.
3. Select
.
4. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control dial.

Continued

155

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

156 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C

■ Cooling

1To rapidly cool down the interior

1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
.
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the A/C button (the indicator on).
Controls

■ To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the
button (the indicator on).

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Press the
button.
3. Press the
button (the indicator on).
4. Set the temperature to maximum heat.

156

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

157 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Climate Control System *
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or
cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Models with audio/information screen

Models without audio/information screen

Dashboard and
Dashboard, floor Floor vents
back of the center and back of the
console vents
center console vents

Floor and
defroster vents

Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch

Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch

Controls

Dashboard and
Dashboard, floor Floor vents Floor and
back of the center and back of the
defroster vents
console vents
center console vents

AUTO
Button

Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
/
Buttons

(Fan Control)

(Recirculation)
Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch

AUTO Button
(Recirculation)
Button

A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
/
Buttons

(Fan Control)

A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button

* Not available on all models

Continued

157

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

158 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
switch.
3. Press the
(On/Off) button to cancel.

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Controls

Press the
(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.

1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.

158

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

159 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Models without audio/
information screen

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Pressing the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.

Controls

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

Models with audio/
information screen

Continued

159

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

160 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
Models without audio/
information screen

Controls
Models with audio/
information screen

160

1. Press the
2. Press the

1To rapidly defrost the windows

button.
button.

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

161 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuClimate Control System * uSynchronized Mode

Synchronized Mode
Models without audio/
information screen

Models with audio/
information screen

1Synchronized Mode
When you press the
button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
Models with navigation system

Controls

The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
uThe system will switch to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

161

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

162 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.

Sensor

Controls

162

Sensor

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

163 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 164
USB Adapter Cable .......................... 165
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 165
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 166
Region Setting * ............................... 167
Audio Remote Controls.................... 168
Models without navigation system
Audio system without touch screen

Models with navigation system

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 215
Audio Error Messages ...................... 268
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 276
Customized Features * ...................... 281
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *.. 318
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ....320, 332, 367
Compass * .................................. 405, 407

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 169
Audio system with touch screen

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 182

* Not available on all models

163

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

164 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Audio System
About Your Audio System
Audio system without touch screen

1About Your Audio System

The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC
files, iPod®, and USB flash drives.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or
the remote controls on the steering wheel.
Audio system with touch screen

The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service *. It can also play
audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disc Drive (HDD) audio *, USB flash drives,
and iPod®, iPhone® and Bluetooth® devices.
Features

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
icons on the touchscreen interface, or the remote controls on the steering wheel.

XM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned
by Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

iPod®

Remote Control

USB Flash
Drive

Models with navigation system

See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.

164

XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.
For more information on XM® Radio, contact a
dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 276

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

165 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable

USB Adapter Cable
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the
adapter cable.
2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB connector.

1USB Adapter Cable

• Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
•
•
•
•

Auxiliary Input Jack

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/
ipod.

Features

Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.

•

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.

1Auxiliary Input Jack
Audio system without touch screen

To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by
pressing the AUX button.
Audio system with touch screen

You can return to the AUX mode by selecting
Change Source on the Audio menu screen or
Source on the touch screen.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace
the audio system.

165

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

166 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.

■ Reactivating the audio system
Audio system without touch screen

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and turn on the audio system.
u If you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q , you will be requested to
enter the audio security code.
2. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons.
Audio system with touch screen

Features

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and turn on the audio system.
u If you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q *1, you will be requested to
enter the audio security code. See step 3.
2. Press and hold the VOL/ (power/volume) button again for more than two
seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, Enter code/Enter PIN Code appears on
the audio/information screen.
3. Enter the audio security code using the touch screen.
All models

If you enter an incorrect digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not
enter the code correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying
again, or visit a dealer to have the system reset.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

166

1Audio System Theft Protection
Find the audio system’s security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and
security code from a dealer.
U.S. models

You can register the security code at Honda Owners
(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how
to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.honda.com.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

167 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio SystemuRegion Setting *

Region Setting *
The audio system’s region setting will be lost when the battery is disconnected or
goes dead.
If the Region Select screen appears, you need to set the region for the audio
system. Follow the steps below:
1. Press
to select OK.
2. Rotate
to select the region you live in, then press .
3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .

1Region Setting *
The region setting is required only when the battery
power is temporarily disconnected. It is set to your
vehicle’s region type by the factory.
You cannot change the setting once you have
completed the setting procedure. Contact a dealer if
you selected an incorrect region.
These indications are used to show how to operate
the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob or the interface dial.
Rotate
to select.
Press

to enter.
Features

* Not available on all models

167

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

168 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM
AM
XM * CD
HDD * USB
*
Button
iPod®
Bluetooth® Audio
Pandora® *
(+ Button
TM*
Aha
AUX
Button

Features

168

(- Button

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : Increases the volume.
Press (- : Decreases the volume.

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : Selects the next preset radio station.
Press : Selects the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : Selects the next strong station.
Press and hold : Selects the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, HDD *, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio *
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD, HDD * or USB flash drive
Press and hold : Skips to the next folder.
Press and hold : Goes back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press and hold : Selects the next station.
Press and hold : Selects the previous station.

* Not available on all models

1Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
Audio system without touch screen

When in the AUX mode, the following is operable
from the remote controls:
• iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
adapter cable

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

169 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Audio System Basic Operation
Audio system without touch screen

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w .
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
access some audio functions.

RETURN
Button

Selector
Knob

MENU
Button

* Not available on all models

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press
to set
your selection.
MENU button: Press to select any setting
such as the clock, sound control, or the
compass *. Press this button again to cancel
the menu display mode.
RETURN button: Press to go back to the
previous display.

Rotate
Press

to select.
to enter.

Press the SOURCE, (+ , (- ,
or
button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 168

Features

Menu Display

Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions. The
extended display has three segments to
display detailed information.

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.

169

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

170 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
Press the MENU button, and rotate
to
adjust the setting, then press . Rotate
to
scroll through the following choices:

RETURN
Button

Selector MENU
Knob
Button

TREBLE
FADER

Features

BALANCE

FADER is selectable.

SVC
CLOCK ADJUST

170

When the adjustment level reaches the center, you
will see C in the display.
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

BASS

SUBW

1Adjusting the Sound

Subwoofer
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Clock setting

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

171 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a
band, then press the preset button.

AM Button
FM Button
Press to select a band.

TITLE Button
Press to switch the RDS name
on and off.

SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the
strongest stations on the
selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, press the
button again.

A.SEL (Auto Select) Button
Press to scan both bands and store
the strongest station in each preset.
To turn off auto select, press the
button again. This restores the
presets you originally set.

FOLDER Bar
Press either side to display and
select an RDS category.

SKIP Bar
Press and hold to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Continued

171

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

172 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing the AM/FM Radio

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

■ RDS INFO ON
Press the TITLE button while listening to an RDS capable station. RDS INFO ON
appears, and the station name is displayed.

■ To find an RDS station from your selected program category
RDS Category

1. Press the FOLDER bar to display and select
an RDS category.
2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station.

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 168
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store six stations each.

Features

Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM
stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal
into the preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can manually store your preferred frequencies.

172

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

173 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

CD Button
Press to play a CD.

TITLE Button
Press to display the text data on a CD
(if it was recorded with text data).

LOAD Button
Press to load a CD.
Press until you hear a beep and see
LOAD in the display to load CDs.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second sampling of each song.
● Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files in
the current folder in MP3 or WMA).
● Press two times to sample the first file in each
of the main folders (MP3 or WMA).
● Press three times to sample the first track on
each CD (the first file in the main folder on
each disc in MP3 or WMA).
● To turn off scan, press and hold the button.

Features

FOLDER Bar
Press to skip to the next folder,
and to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3 or WMA.

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

SKIP Bar
Press
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA).
MENU Button
Press to display menu items
(if available).
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/files. Turn
to select an item, then press to set
your selection.
RETURN Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Continued

173

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

174 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA)

1Playing a CD
NOTICE

1. Press

to switch the display to a folder list.

Folder Selection

Features

Track Selection

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
The display shows up to 31 characters of text data.
Press and hold the TITLE button to see additional
characters. indicates that the text data continues.
The display goes back to the previous screen if you
press and hold the button again.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

174

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

175 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous
display, and press the MENU button to cancel this
setting mode.

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or files.
1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate
to select PLAY MODE, then
press .

3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

Features

Play Mode
Items

Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track/file.
REPEAT ONE FLD (MP3/WMA): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
REPEAT DISC: Repeats the current CD.
RANDOM IN FLD (MP3/WMA): Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
RANDOM IN DISC: Plays all tracks/files in the current
CD in random order.
SCAN TRK (MP3/WMA): Samples all tracks on the
CD. Samples all files in the current folder.
SCAN FLD (MP3/WMA): Samples the first file in
each folder on the CD.
SCAN DISC: Samples the first track/file on each CD.

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select PLAY MODE, then press .
3. Rotate
to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .

175

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

176 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 165

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
TITLE Button
Press to display the text data.

SKIP Bar
Press
or
RETURN Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

to change songs.

MENU Button
Press to display menu items.

Selector Knob
Turn to select a song, file, menu
item, or play mode. Press to set
your selection.

176

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

177 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

■ How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1. Press

1Playing an iPod®

to display the iPod® menu.

Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

iPod® Menu:
Playlists, Artists,
Albums, and Songs

2. Rotate

to select a menu.
Features

3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .

Continued

177

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

178 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
SHUFFLE OFF: Turns off the shuffle mode.
SHUFFLE ALL: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order.
SHUFFLE ALBUM: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, or songs) in
random order.
REPEAT OFF: Turns off the repeat mode.
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track.

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate
to select PLAY MODE, then
press .
Features
Play Mode Items

3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select PLAY MODE, then press .
3. Rotate
to select NORMAL PLAY, then press

178

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

179 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 165

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
TITLE Button
Press to display the text data.
SKIP Bar
Press
or

SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second sampling of each file.
● Press to sample all files in the current folder.
● Press two times to sample the first file in
each of the main folders.
● To turn off scan, press and hold the button.

Features

FOLDER Bar
Press to skip to the next
folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder.

Selector Knob
Turn to select a file, then press to
set your selection.

to change files.

MENU Button
Press to display menu items.
RETURN Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this audio unit.

Continued

179

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

180 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press

to switch the display to a folder list.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 USB Flash Drives P. 280
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and
then skips to the next file.

Folder Selection

Features

180

Track Selection

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

181 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current file.
REPEAT ONE FLD: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
RANDOM IN FLD: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
RANDOM ALL: Plays all files in random order.
SCAN TRK: Samples all files in the current folder.
SCAN FLD: Samples the first file in each folder.

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate
to select PLAY MODE, then
press .

Features

Play Mode Items

3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select PLAY MODE, then press .
3. Rotate
to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .

181

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

182 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with two displays

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w *1.
Use the selector knob, DISP and BACK
VOL/ Knob
buttons to access some audio functions.
Press to turn the audio

Features

system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
DISP (SETTINGS) Button

Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

MENU/SEL
(Selector) Knob

MENU/SEL (Selector) knob: Rotate left or
right to scroll through the available choices.
Press to set your selection.

Button

BACK Button

Also press to select any mode. The available
mode includes Change Source, Station List,
Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and
play modes. Play modes can be also selected
from Scan, Random/Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

182

These indications are used to show how to operate
the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob.
Rotate
Press

to select.
to enter.

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 195
2 Save Preset P. 194, 199
2 Radio text P. 196
2 Music Search P. 201, 205, 211
2 Scan P. 202, 212
2 Random/Repeat P. 202, 206, 212

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

183 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.

■ Selecting an Audio Source

Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select Source.

Use the

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

icons to turn the page.

Features

Source List Icons

■ Displaying the Menu Items

Select More.

Menu Items

Select More to display the menu items.

Continued

183

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

184 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

■ Changing the Clock/Screen Settings
Select

Select

1Changing the Clock/Screen Settings
.

to adjust the clock and screen settings.

Features

■ Changing the Clock settings
2 Setting the Clock P. 88

■ Changing the Screen settings
1. Select Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

184

The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Fade Timer
Sets the screen black out timing.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

185 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

■ Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 191

Features

185

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

186 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Using the

Press the

button

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button

Features

186

Audio

Trip Computer
(Current Drive)

Clock/Wallpaper

Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)

Audio/Information Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

187 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Using the DISP button

Function Change Screen
DISP Button
Features

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Press the DISP button to go to the Function Change screen.
Rotate
to select Audio, Phone, Info or Settings and press

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 332
■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen. 2Customized Features * P. 281
* Not available on all models

Continued

187

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

188 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper information.
Press , rotate
to select an item, then press .
Info menu items
Current Drive (Trip computer)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

Features

History of Trip A (Trip computer)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
Delete History
1. Rotate
to select Delete History, then press .
2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
then press .
Clock/Wallpaper
Shows the current clock type and wallpaper
Clock/Wallpaper Change
Enters the clock and wallpaper setting menu screen.

188

to select Yes,

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

189 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
adapter cable.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Adapter Cable P. 165

Continued

•
•

You can also enter the wallpaper setup menu screen
to select Settings, Info Settings, then Clock/
Wallpaper Type.

Features

2. Press the DISP button to go to the
Function change screen.
3. Rotate
to select Info, then press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/
Wallpaper Change, Clock/Wallpaper
Type, then Wallpaper.
4. Rotate
to select Add New, then press .
uThe picture name is displayed on the list.
5. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press
to save the data.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

189

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

190 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the DISP button to go to the Function change screen.
2. Rotate
to select Info, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper change, Clock/Wallpaper
Type, then Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
Features

190

1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the DISP button to go to the Function change screen.
2. Rotate
to select Info, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper change, Clock/Wallpaper
Type, then Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select OK, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

191 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
DISP (SETTINGS) Button

MENU/SEL
(Selector) Knob

1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Sound, then press .

1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

BACK Button

Rotate
choices:

to scroll through the following

Features

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

Subwoofer

SVC

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

191

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

192 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the DISP button to go to the Settings
screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
4. Rotate
to adjust the setting.
Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the DISP button to go to the Settings
screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Others.
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

192

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

193 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.

Features

Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Presets
Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Continued

193

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

194 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.

1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate
4. Rotate
.

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press .
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

Features

194

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 168
You can also switch the mode by pressing
and
selecting Change Source on the Audio menu
screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

195 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press .
3. Rotate
to select the station, then press .

Continued

Features

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press .
3. Rotate
to select UPDATE LIST, then press .

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

195

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

196 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press
to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
Features

196

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Radio text
The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

197 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *

Playing XM® Radio *

Audio/Information Screen

Source
Select to change an audio source.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and
select an XM® Radio category.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Presets
Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold
to change the channel rapidly.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.

* Not available on all models

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Continued

197

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

198 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *

■ To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio *
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

1. Select the XM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 168
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 183

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate
4. Rotate
5. Rotate
6. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select XM Tune Mode, then press .
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press
to select Channel List, then press .
to select a channel from a list, then press .

Audio with Touch Screen

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or the
preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

198

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

199 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.

1Playing XM® Radio *
You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset
memory.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate
4. Rotate
.

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press .
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

* Not available on all models

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

199

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

200 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder, and
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
Audio with Touch Screen

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

Source
Select to change an audio source.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

200

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

201 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a CD

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .

WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

2. Rotate
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

Features

Folder Selection

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.

File Selection

4. Rotate

to select a file, then press

Continued

201

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

202 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat is selected.
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

202

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

203 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then select
the iPod mode.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 165

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Album Bar
Select to search for an album.

Album Art Icon

Source
Select to change an audio source.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Continued

203

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

204 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

■ How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar

Features

204

Album Image

1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

205 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate
to select a menu.
3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .

Folder Selection
Features

File Selection

Continued

205

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

206 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press .

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

206

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

207 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

U.S. models

1Playing Internet Radio

Compatible phones only

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.

Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable.
Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

Rating Icon
Audio with Touch Screen

Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.

Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.

Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.

Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

* Not available on all models

Features

USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.

Continued

207

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

208 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like
• Dislike
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause
Features

■ Operating a menu item
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select an item and press .

To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® * P. 273
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.

208

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

209 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ AhaTM Menu

1AhaTM Menu

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• 15sec Back
• Play/Pause
• 30sec Skip
• Stations
• View text
• Change Source
• View list
• Dislike

■ Operating a menu item

Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM * P. 275
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.

Features

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select an item and press .

To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.

* Not available on all models

209

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

210 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.

Source
Select to change an audio source.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

210

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

211 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 USB Flash Drives P. 280
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

Folder Selection
Features

File Selection

Continued

211

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

212 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat is selected.
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

212

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

213 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 339
Audio/
Information
Screen

Source
Select to change
an audio source.

Pause Icon
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.

BACK Button
Press to go back to
the previous
display.

More
Select to display
the menu items.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

Audio with
Touch Screen
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folder.

Play Icon

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.

Features

VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected to
HFL.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob
Press and turn to select an
item, then press to set your
selection.
Continued

213

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

214 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

Features

■ To pause or resume a file
MENU/SEL (Selector) knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Play or Pause, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

Select the play icon or pause icon.

■ Switching to HFL

1Switching to HFL

Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 332

Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

Button
Button

214

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

215 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with navigation system

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w *1.
Use the interface dial or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

Button

Interface Dial

These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate

to select.

Press

to enter.

Move

to select secondary menu.

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 234
2 Save Preset P. 233, 238
2 Radio text P. 235
2 Music Search P. 240, 244, 254, 264
2 Scan P. 241, 245, 265
2 Random/Repeat P. 241, 245, 255, 265

Features

Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection. Move right, left, up or down to
select secondary menu.
MENU button: Press to select any mode. The
available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.

Voice Control System
The audio system is voice operable. See the
navigation system manual for details.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

215

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

216 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.

■ Selecting an Audio Source

Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select Source.

Use the

Features

Source List Icons

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

■ Displaying the Menu Items

Select More.

Select More to display the menu items.

216

Menu Items

icons to turn the page.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

217 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

■ Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

1. Select More, then Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

1Changing the Screen Settings
The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Fade Timer
Sets the screen black out timing.

Features

■ Changing the Screen Settings

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 222

217

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

218 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

1Switching the Display
You can also use the AUDIO, NAV, PHONE and
INFO buttons to go to the corresponding display.

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button

Features

218

Audio

Navigation

Info

Phone

Audio/Information Screen

PHONE Button

INFO Button

NAV Button

AUDIO Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

219 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Navigation
Shows the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 367
■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
Features

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Deleting the history manually
1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press .
2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
Continued

219

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

220 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
adapter cable.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Adapter Cable P. 165

Features

220

2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type.
4. Move
to select Wallpaper.
uThe screen will change to the wallpaper
list.
5. Move to select Add New, then press .
6. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Press , then move to select Start
Import.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

•
•

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 6 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

221 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

Features

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
7. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

.
To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

221

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

222 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Sound, then press .

SETTINGS Button

Rotate
choices:

to scroll through the following

Features

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

Subwoofer

SVC

222

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

223 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
4. Rotate
to adjust the setting.

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

1Changing the Screen Brightness

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

223

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

224 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of
the navigation system functions.
The voice control system uses the
(Talk) and
(hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

1Voice Control Operation

■ Voice Recognition

1Voice Recognition

Features

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control
system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
• Refer to the Voice Help feature.
2 Refer to the navigation System Manual

224

When you press the
button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.

The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

225 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Voice Portal Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
Voice Portal screen.
• Call Your contact name
• Call Phone Number
• Find nearest POI category name
• Go home
• Route menu
• Cancel route

■ Navigation Commands

■ Info Commands

The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Call by number
• Call by name

The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Trip computer
• Traffic information
• Display clock
• Display wallpaper

When the
(Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.

Continued

Features

■ Phone Commands

Contacts that are imported from your
phone to the vehicle are all made available
by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded
for each of your Speed Dial entries.

■ On Screen Commands

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

225

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

226 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Climate Control Commands

Features

226

The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
• Climate control automatic*1
• Climate control off*1
• Air conditioner on*1
• Air conditioner off*1
• Climate control defrost on*1
• Climate control defrost off*1
• Rear defrost on*1
• Rear defrost off*1
• Climate control fresh air
• Climate control recirculate
• Climate control vent
• Climate control bi-level
• Climate control floor
• Climate control floor and defrost
• Fan speed up
• Fan speed down
• Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)
• Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15
to 29°C)
• Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to
87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57
to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Temperature up
• Temperature down

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Driver temperature up
Driver temperature down
Passenger temperature up
Passenger temperature down
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Driver temperature max heat
Driver temperature max cool
Passenger temperature max heat
Passenger temperature max cool
Climate control sync on*1
Climate control sync off*1

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

■ Audio Commands
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.

■ Using Song By VoiceTM
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you
to select music from your Hard Disc Drive or
iPod® device using your voice.
To activate this mode, you must press the
(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen
and say: ”Music search.”

■ Song By VoiceTM commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Music search
List album (specify album)
List artist (specify artist)
List composer (specify composer)
List genre (specify genre)
List playlist (specify playlist)
Play album (specify album)
Play artist (specify artist)
Play composer (specify composer)
Play genre (specify genre)
Play playlist (specify playlist)
Play song (specify song)
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

227 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Radio commands

Hard Disc Drive play
Hard Disc Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Hard Disc Drive skip forward
Hard Disc Drive skip back
Hard Disc Drive album up*2
Hard Disc Drive album down*2
Hard Disc Drive track up
Hard Disc Drive track down
Hard Disc Drive playlist up*2
Hard Disc Drive playlist down*2
Hard Disc Drive track random*1
Hard Disc Drive track repeat*1
Hard Disc Drive track scan*1
Hard Disc Drive normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
*2: These commands are available only in
the corresponding playback mode.
For example, “Artist” commands are
available only in “Artist” mode.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Audio on*1
Audio off*1
Radio on*1
Radio off*1
Radio select FM
Radio select AM
Radio tune to # FM
(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)
Radio tune to # AM
(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to
1710 [seventeen ten])
Radio seek up
Radio seek down
Radio next station
Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)
Radio scan*1
Radio select XM
XM channel #
(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])
XM channel down
XM category up
XM category down
XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
XM scan*1
XM category mode
XM channel mode

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
NOTE:
Radio volume levels cannot be controlled
using voice control.

■ Disc commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Disc play
Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Disc skip forward
Disc skip back
Disc track random*1
Disc track repeat*1
Disc track scan*1
Disc folder up
Disc folder down
Disc folder random*1
Disc folder repeat*1
Disc folder scan*1
Disc normal play

Features

■ HDD commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

Continued

227

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

228 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

■ iPod® commands

■ USB commands

■ Bluetooth® Audio commands

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

iPod play
iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)
iPod skip forward
iPod skip back
iPod track shuffle*1
iPod album shuffle*1
iPod track repeat*1
iPod normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

228

USB play
USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)
USB skip forward
USB skip back
USB track random*1
USB track repeat*1
USB track scan*1
USB folder up
USB folder down
USB folder random*1
USB folder repeat*1
USB folder scan*1
USB normal play

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

Bluetooth Audio play
Bluetooth Audio skip forward
Bluetooth Audio skip back
Bluetooth Audio group up
Bluetooth Audio group down
Bluetooth Audio pause
Bluetooth Audio resume
Bluetooth Audio track random
Bluetooth Audio track repeat

NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.

■ AUX commands
• Auxiliary play

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

229 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Pandora® commands *

■ AhaTM commands *

■ Internet service commands *

The system accepts these commands while
the Pandora® is playing.
• Pandora play
• Pandora skip forward
• Pandora station up
• Pandora station down
• Pandora pause
• Pandora resume
• Pandora thumbs up
• Pandora thumbs down

The system accepts these commands while
the AhaTM is playing.
• Aha Radio play
• Aha Radio skip forward
• Aha Radio skip back
• Aha Radio station up
• Aha Radio station down
• Aha Radio resume
• Aha Radio pause
• Aha Radio like
• Aha Radio dislike

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

*1: The system accepts these commands
while the Internet service is playing.

Continued

Features

* Not available on all models

Internet service play
Internet service skip forward*1
Internet service skip back*1
Internet service station up*1
Internet service station down*1
Internet service resume*1
Internet service pause*1
Internet service like*1
Internet service dislike*1

229

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

230 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Keyboard Entry Commands
In keyboard screen, letters can be selected
by saying each individual letter or by saying
a keyword phrase. These keyword phrases
are:

Features

230

■ Letters
Say . . .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

■ Numbers
Or say . . .
Apple/Alpha
Boy/Bravo
Charlie
Dog/Delta
Edward/Echo
Frank/Foxtrot
George/Golf
Henry/Hotel
Igloo/India
John/Juliet
King/Kilo
Larry/Lima
Mary/Mike
Nancy/November
Oscar
Paul/Papa
Queen/Quebec
Robert/Romeo
Sam/Sierra
Tom/Tango
Uncle/Uniform
Victor
William/Whiskey
X-ray
Yellow/Yankee
Zebra/Zulu

Number . . .
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Or say . . .
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

231 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Symbols
Or say . . .
Hyphen
Exclamation point
Double Quote
Pound
Dollar
Percent
Ampersand
Apostrophe
Open Parenthesis
Close Parenthesis
Tilde
Slash
Less than
Greater than
Open Brace
Close Brace

Symbol . . .
À
Â
Ä
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Î
Ï
Ô
Ù
Û
Ü

Or say . . .
A grave
A circumflex
A umlaut
C cedilla
E grave
E acute
E circumflex
E umlaut
I grave
I circumflex
I umlaut
O circumflex
U grave
U circumflex
U umlaut

■ Punctuation marks
Symbol . . .
@
^
*
_
`
,
.
?
:
;
+

Or say . . .
At Sign
Caret
Asterisk
Underscore
Back Quote
Comma
Dot
Question mark
Colon
Semicolon
Plus

Features

Symbol . . .
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
~
/
<
>
{
}

■ Accented letters

231

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

232 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Features

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Presets
Select to store a station.

Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.

Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up
and down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.

To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

232

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

233 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224

To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
Audio with Touch Screen

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 168
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the Audio
menu screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

Continued

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

233

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

234 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press .
3. Rotate
to select the station, then press .

■ Manual update

Features

234

Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Refresh, then press .

1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

235 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio text
Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .

1Radio text
The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press
to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

235

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

236 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

Playing XM® Radio
Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Features

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Presets
Select to store a station.

To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

236

Source
Select to change an audio source.

Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an XM® Radio category.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold to
change the channel rapidly.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

237 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

■ To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio
You can control the XM® radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224

1. Select the XM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 168
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 216

In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select XM Tune Mode, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press
5. Rotate
to select Channel List, then press .
6. Rotate
to select a channel from a list, then press .

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

Audio with Touch Screen

Continued

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or
the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

237

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

238 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
Audio with Touch Screen

Features

238

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

1Playing XM® Radio
You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset
memory.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

239 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Audio/Information Screen

Source
Select to change an audio source.
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
Features

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.
Continued

239

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

240 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD
NOTICE

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

Features

Folder Selection

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
You can control a CD audio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224

File Selection

240

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

241 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is selected.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files
in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10second sampling of the first file in each of the main
folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

241

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

242 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have
been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play
the tracks using various search methods.
Audio/Information Screen

Source
Select to change an audio source.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

242

Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next playlist/
album, and
to skip to the beginning
of the previous playlist/album.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
SETTINGS Button
Press to go the Setting menu screen.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

243 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Recording a Music CD to HDD

1Recording a Music CD to HDD

The songs on music CDs are automatically recorded by factory default to the HDD
the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.
Recording Indicator

You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can
mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on
the HDD.
2 Editing an Album or Playlist P. 246
2 Editing Track Information P. 249
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned
off while recording a CD, there may be pauses
between songs when you play back from the HDD.

Recording
Ready to record

Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available
during recording.

■ Stop Recording
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press

Features

You can play music from other sources (e.g., XM,
HDD, etc.) while recording.
Please note that there is no compensation offered in
the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or
the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

Clearing the HDD
Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 317

■ Recording a CD Manually
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Rec to HDD, then press

1Recording a CD Manually
Use this feature to set up the music search abilities
when using Song By Voice™ (SBV) commands.

Continued

243

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

244 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

Features

244

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a track from the Music Search list.
u Title information is displayed if found in
the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database) stored on the HDD.
u The HDD has two types of playlists:
original playlists and user playlists. An
original playlist is automatically created
for each album when a music CD is
recorded. You can customize up to six
user playlists provided on the HDD by
adding tracks from your original playlists.

1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
You can control the HDD audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 256
Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded
onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed
using ultra-efficient compression technology;
therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the
original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and
cannot be recovered.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the display.
2 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 270

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

245 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first track in each album.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on HDD.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is selected.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current
album.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.
Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current
album in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
Continued

245

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

246 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Editing an Album or Playlist

1Editing an Album or Playlist

Features

Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current
playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
■ Editing an album
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. To edit an album name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.
To delete an album:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then press
.
2 Editing Track Information P. 249

246

The maximum number of songs in each of the six
user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites
the oldest songs.
The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with
a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.
Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding
a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist
will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the
album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a
user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.
The folder retains the playlist name and artist
information.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

247 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

To delete a playlist:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

Features

■ Editing a playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then press
.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. To edit a playlist name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.

To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then press
.
2 Editing Track Information P. 249

Continued

247

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

248 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Creating a new playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Create New Playlist,
then press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen, then select
tracks from the Music Search list.
Features

248

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

249 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Editing Track Information

To delete a track:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

Features

Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Tracks, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a track you want to edit
or delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. To edit track information:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
u Enter the track name, track artist, etc.
using the interface dial or the audio with
touch screen. Move , rotate
to
select OK, then press .

Continued

249

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

250 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Displaying Music Information

Features

250

Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing
the Gracenote® Album Info.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
4. Rotate
to select an album you want to
edit, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
6. Move to select Get Music Info, then
press .
u The system starts to access the
Gracenote® Album Info.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

251 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Updating Gracenote® Album Info

To acquire updated files:
• Consult a dealer.
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com.
• Canada: Visit www.hondanavi.ca.
Once you perform an update, any information you
edited before will be overwritten or erased.

Features

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included
with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or
connect the USB flash drive that includes
the update.
2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD
mode.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Gracenote Album DB Info Update.
4. Rotate
to select Update from CD or
Update from USB, then press .
u The system starts updating and the
confirmation message appears on the
screen. Press
to finish.

1Updating Gracenote® Album Info

251

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

252 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then select
the iPod mode.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 165
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod® is connected.
Album Art

Audio with Touch Screen
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

Source
Select to change an audio source.

Album Art Icon
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

Album Bar
Select to search for an album.
More
Select to display the menu items.

252

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

253 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

■ How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar

Album Image

Features

1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

Continued

253

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

254 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
You can control an iPod® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 256
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

Features

254

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a song from the Music Search list.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

255 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press .

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

255

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

256 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod® using voice
commands.

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options:

• On (factory default): Song By Voice commands are

■ To enable SBV

available.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Song by Voice, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.
Features

256

• Off: Disable the feature.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

257 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Searching for music using SBV

1Searching for music using SBV
Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2 Song By VoiceTM commands P. 226
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the HDD or iPod®.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 258
Features

1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the
(Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
HDD and iPod®.
3. Press the
button and say a command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the
(hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the
button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.

Continued

257

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

258 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Phonetic Modification

Features

258

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the HDD or iPod®.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification, then press .
4. Move and rotate
to select New
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select HDD or iPod, then
press .

1Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

259 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Features

6. Rotate
to select the item to modify
(e.g., Artist), then press .
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
7. Rotate
to select an entry (e.g., No
Name), then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
u The listen to the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select Play,
then press .
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select
Delete, then press .
8. Rotate
to select Modify, then press
.
9. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to
use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.
10. Move to select OK to exit.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the
(Talk)
button and use the voice command
“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the
artist “No Name.”

259

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

260 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

U.S. models
Compatible phones only

Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable.
Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is connected.
Album Art
Audio with Touch Screen
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

260

Rating Icon
Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.

Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.

Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

More
Select to display the menu items.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.

Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

261 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Skip Forward
• Dislike
• Play/Pause
• Bookmark This Song
• Station List
• Bookmark This Artist
• Like
• Change Source

■ Operating a menu item

To select Change Source, press the MENU
button, then press .

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu

Features

The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .

To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.

You can control Pandora® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® * P. 273
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.

* Not available on all models

Continued

261

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

262 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ AhaTM Menu

1AhaTM Menu

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• View text
• Dislike
• View list
• Play/Pause
• Reply
• 15sec Back
• Change Source
• 30sec Skip
• Stations

■ Operating a menu item
Features

The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .
To select Change Source or Stations, press
the MENU button, then press .

AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
You can control AhaTM Radio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM * P. 275
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.

262

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

263 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 165
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
Audio with Touch Screen

Source
Select to change an audio source.
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.
Continued

263

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

264 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
You can control a USB flash drive using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 USB Flash Drives P. 280
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.

Folder Selection
Features

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.

File Selection

264

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

265 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is selected.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

265

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

266 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume)
Knob
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Pause Icon
Interface Dial/
ENTER Button
Press and turn to
select an item, then
press to set your
selection. Move up,
down, right and left
to select secondary
menu.

266

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected to
HFL.
Source
Select to change
an audio source.
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folders.
Play Icon
More
Select to display
the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 224

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

267 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

Features

■ To pause or resume a file
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Play or Pause, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

Select the play icon or pause icon.

■ Switching to HFL

1Switching to HFL

Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 367

Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

Button
Button

267

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

268 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Audio system without touch screen

Error Message

Cause

HEAT ERROR

High temperature

UNSUPPORTED

Track/file format not supported

Features

BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK OWNERS
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
MECH ERROR

Solution
●

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

●

Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.

●

Press the
(eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.

●

Mechanical error

2 Protecting CDs P. 278
●

CHANGER ERROR
●

CHECK DISK LOAD

268

●

BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK OWNERS
MANUAL

Servo error

CHECK DISC

Disc error

●

If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 278

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

269 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio Error MessagesuCD Player

Audio system with touch screen

Error Message
Unplayable File
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject

Cause
Track/file format not supported

Mechanical error

Solution
●

Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.

●

Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.

●

2 Protecting CDs P. 278

Mecha Error

●

Servo error

Check Disc

Disc error

Heat Error

High temperature

●

Features

●

Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual

If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 278

●

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

269

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

270 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Models with navigation system

Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Navigation system is suspended due to low air pressure.
System will resume when vehicle moves to an area of lower
altitude.
HDD access error.
Please consult your dealer.
Features

270

Solution
The HDD is inoperable due to low atmospheric pressure. Move
your vehicle to a lower altitude where atmospheric pressure is
higher.
—

The navigation system temperature is too high. For
protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

The navigation system temperature is too low. For
protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.

The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the
temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation
system starts up automatically when the display warms up.

Unplayable File

Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be
skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

271 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

iPod®/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Audio system without touch screen

Error Message

Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.

BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK OWNERS
MANUAL

An incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn
it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

iPod NO SONG

Appears when the iPod® is empty.

UNSUPPORTED VER.

Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
update the iPod® software to the newer version.

CONNECT RETRY

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

UNPLAYABLE FILE

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

USB NO SONG

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.

UNSUPPORTED

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

Continued

Features

USB ERROR

271

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

272 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

Audio system with touch screen

Error Message

Solution

Features

USB Error

Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Unsupported Version

Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
update the iPod® software to the newer version.

Connect Retry

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

Unplayable File

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
iPod®

Appears when the iPod® is empty.
USB flash drive

No Data

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
iPod® and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported

272

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

273 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® *

U.S. models

Pandora® *
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual

Solution
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Audio/Information Screen

There is no station list in the device.
Please add the station list to your device.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.

No stations have been created.
Please create a station on the device.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Audio/Information Screen

Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may
skip each hour.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
predetermined number of times in an hour.
Audio with Touch Screen
Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may
skip each hour.

* Not available on all models

Continued

273

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

274 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® *

Error Message

Features

274

Solution

Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip

Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.

No data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.

Cannot connect to PANDORA. When stopped, check your
mobile phone.

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your
device.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

275 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM *

U.S. models
TM *

Aha

If an error occurs while playing AhaTM, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution

Cannot connect to HondaLink. When stopped, check your
mobile device.

Appears when the AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.

Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.
Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Features

* Not available on all models

275

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

276 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

General Information on the Audio System
XM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to XM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob or the interface dial until 0
appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®
website to subscribe.

■ Receiving XM® Radio

Features

Switch to the XM® mode by pressing the SOURCE button repeatedly or operating
the audio with touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

■ XM® Radio Display Messages
Loading:
XM® is loading the audio or program information.
Ch off air:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Ch unauthorized:
XM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
No signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Ch unavailable:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
Check antenna:
There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

276

* Not available on all models

1Subscribing to XM® Radio
Contact Information for XM® Radio:
US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 8529696
Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or (877)
209-0079

1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

277 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs

Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.

1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.

The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Models with navigation system

Also includes:

Features

■ CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

Continued

277

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

278 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

1Protecting CDs
NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs

Bubbled/
Wrinkled

Features

●

Using
Printer Label
Kit

Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs

Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs

3-inch
(8-cm)
CD

278

With Label/
Sticker

Warped

Burrs

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

279 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility

1iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.

Audio system without touch screen

Model
iPod classic® 80GB/160GB
iPod classic® 120GB
iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod® (5th generation)
iPod nano®
iPod touch®
Audio system with touch screen

Features

Model
iPod® (5th generation)
iPod classic® 80GB/160GB
iPod classic® 120GB
iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano®
iPod touch®
iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 3GS/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S

Continued

279

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

280 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

■ USB Flash Drives
•
•
•
•
•

Features

280

Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

281 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Customized Features *
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

1Customized Features *
Models without navigation system

■ How to customize

When you customize settings, make sure that the
vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P .

Models without navigation system

With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, press and hold the DISP button, then rotate
to select Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings,
System Settings or Info Settings and press .

To customize other features, rotate
, and press
2 List of customizable options P. 294

Audio/Information Screen

Features

DISP Button

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

281

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

282 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Models with navigation system

1Customized Features *

With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate
to
select Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings,
System Settings, Info Settings, or Navi Settings and press .
Audio/Information Screen

To customize other features, rotate
, move
or , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 304

Features

Interface Dial

SETTINGS Button

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

282

* Not available on all models

Models with navigation system

When you customize setting, make sure that the
vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P .
,

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

283 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Models without navigation system

■ Customization flow
Brightness
Contrast
Black level

Display

Press and hold the DISP button.

Beep
Bluetooth

Bluetooth
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code

Voice Recognition
Clock

Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Clock Type
Wallpaper

Features

System
Settings

Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Others

Language
Display Operation Restriction Tips
Background Color
Header Clock Display
Factory data reset

Default

Continued

283

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

284 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Driver Assist System Setup *
Meter
Setup

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Driving Position Setup *
Keyless
Access
Setup
Lighting
Setup

Door
Setup

Maintenance Info.
Default All

284

* Not available on all models

Forward Collision Warning
Distance *

Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing

Memory Position Link
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

285 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Audio
Settings
Default

Clock Type
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format

Features

Info
Settings

Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Sound
Source Select Popup
Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth Device List
USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *

Default

* Not available on all models

Continued

285

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

286 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Connect
Phone

Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect

Bluetooth
Device
List
Phone
Settings

Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email

Features

Phone

Select Account *
New Text/Email Alert
Message Auto Reading
Default

286

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

287 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

LaneWatch

Camera
Settings

Rear
Camera

Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default

Features

Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default

Continued

287

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

288 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Models with navigation system

■ Customization flow
Press the SETTINGS button.

Display

System
Settings

Features

Default

Sound/
Beep

Bluetooth

Voice
Recog.

288

Brightness
Contrast
Black level
Volume
Interface Dial Feedback
Message Auto Reading
Verbal Reminder
Bluetooth Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Volume
Voice Prompt
Song by Voice
Song by Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

289 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Clock

Clock/Wallpaper
Type

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Others

Features

* Not available on all models

Units
Language
Voice Command Tips
Background Color
Header Clock Display
System Device Information
Factory data reset

Continued

289

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

290 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Driver
Assist
System
Setup

Forward Collision Warning Distance

Meter
Setup

Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing

Driving Position Setup
Keyless
Access
Setup

Default

Lighting
Setup

Memory Position Link
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto light Sensitivity

Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Door
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Setup
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Info.
Maintenance Reset

290

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

291 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

LaneWatch
Camera
Settings

Default

Rear
Camera

Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Next Maneuver Pop up
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Features

Default
Sound
Source Select Setup
Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Audio
Settings

Bluetooth Device List
Recording from CD
Recording Quality
HDD Info

Default

Gracenote Album DB Info Update
Update Gracenote Album Info
Delete all HDD Data
USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *

* Not available on all models

Continued

291

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

292 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Phone

Connect phone

Default

Bluetooth Device
List

Disconnect
Edit Bluetooth
Device
Add Bluetooth
Device

Phone
Settings

Features

Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo

Default

Text/Email

Default

292

Add Bluetooth
Device

Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

293 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Navi
Settings

See Navigation System Manual.

Clock

Info
Settings

Features

Others

Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
INFO Screen Preference

Default

* Not available on all models

Continued

293

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

294 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

■ List of customizable options
Models without navigation system

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display

Features

System
Settings

Description

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Selects whether a beeper sounds or not when
you operate the selector knob.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.

Beep

Bluetooth

Edit Pairing Code
Voice Recognition
*1:Default Setting

294

—

2 Phone Setup P. 339

Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 341

Turns the voice recognition on and off.

Random*1/Fixed
On*1/Off

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

295 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock Type
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock

Wallpaper

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Selectable Settings
Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Add New

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 189

Adjust Clock.

—

2 Setting the Clock P. 88

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 24H to 12H.

12H*1/24H

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/
Spanish

Display Operation
Restriction Tips

Selects whether the display operation restriction
message is shown or not.

On*1/Off

Background Color

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch screen*.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green

Header Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on or not.

On*1/Off

Factory Data Reset
Default

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 315

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.

Features

Others

Changes the clock display type.
●

Clock Adjustment

System
Settings

Description

Yes/No
Yes/No

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Continued

295

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

296 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Driver
Assist
System
Setup *

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Meter
Setup

Driving
Position
Setup*

Forward Collision Warning
Distance *

Selectable Settings

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.

Long*1/Normal/
Short/Off

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few
degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

Memory Position Link

Changes the driver’s seat and door mirror
positions to a stored setting.

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting

296

Description

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

297 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Keyless
Access
Setup

Lighting
Setup

Selectable Settings

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/
All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
either front door handle.

On*1/Off

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.

60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Description

*1:Default Setting

Continued

297

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

298 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Maintenance
Info.
Default
All
*1:Default Setting

298

Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.

With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.

Driver Door with Shift
to P*1/All Doors with
Shift to P/Driver Door
with IGN Off/All Doors
with IGN Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All
Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors and the
tailgate to relock and the security system to set
after you unlock the vehicle without opening any
door or the tailgate.

90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1

Maintenance Reset

Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.

Auto Door Lock

Door
Setup

Description

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.

—

Yes/No

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

299 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.

Sound

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 191

Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on or not when Audio is selected
on the Function Change screen.

Source Select Popup
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Audio
Settings

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Bluetooth Device List
iPod®, Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM
mode

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority
Default

-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,
Treble, Fader, Balance
and Subwoofer), Off/
Low/Mid*1/High (SVC)
On/Off*1

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.

—

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.

—

Features

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Selectable Settings

Selects the connection to have priority.

Bluetooth/USB*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

299

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

300 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Info
Settings

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock Type
Wallpaper
See System Settings on P. 294 to P. 295

Clock Adjustment
Clock Format

Features

300

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

301 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Connect Phone

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 339

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 339

Edit Speed Dial

—

2 Speed Dial P. 350

Features

Phone
Settings

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

On*1/Off

Auto Answer

Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.

On/Off*1

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed*1/Mobile
Phone/Off

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo

Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.

On*1/Off

Phone

*1:Default Setting

Continued

301

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

302 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Features

Phone
Settings

Customizable Features

Selectable Settings

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text message/E-mail function on and
off.

Select Account *

Selects a mail or text message account.

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message/Email.

On/Off*1

Message Auto Reading

Sets the system to automatically read an
incoming text message/E-mail.
● On- A text message/E-mail is always read
aloud.
● Off- A text message/E-mail is not read aloud.
● Auto- A text message/E-mail is read aloud only
when driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

Text/
Email

Default
*1:Default Setting

302

Description

* Not available on all models

On*1/Off
—

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

303 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Show with Turn Signal

Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.

On*1/Off

Reference Lines

Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Display
Camera
Settings

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.

—

Features

LaneWatch

Color
Tint
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Yes/No

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Yes/No

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or
not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
or not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.

Yes/No

Default

Rear
Camera

*1:Default Setting
Continued

303

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

304 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

■ List of customizable options
Models with navigation system

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display

Features

System
Settings

Sound/
Beep

Bluetooth

Description

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Volume

Changes the volume of the audio speakers.

—

Interface Dial Feedback *

Sets if and when the system reads aloud a
selection made using the Interface Dial.

On*1/Off/Auto

Message Auto Reading

Selects whether the system automatically read
out message, does not read, or read out only
when driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Verbal Reminder *

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.

Edit Pairing Code
*1:Default Setting

304

—

2 Phone Setup P. 373

* Not available on all models

Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 375

Random*1/Fixed

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

305 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Voice
Recog.

Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 256

Song by Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for music stored in
the HDD or an iPod®.

Phonebook Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Clock Adjustment

On*1/Off
On*1/Off

—

2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 388

Changes the clock display type.

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 220

Clock

—

2 Phonetic Modification P. 258

●

Wallpaper

Selectable Settings

Analogue/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off

Features

System
Settings

Description

Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Time Zone

Adjust Clock.

—

2 Setting the Clock P. 88

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Auto Time Zone *

Sets the navigation system to automatically
adjust the clock when driving through different
time zones.

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Continued

305

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

306 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one
hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.

Clock Reset

Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group.

Units *

Changes the distance unit on the navigation map
screen.

miles*1/km

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/
Spanish

Voice Command Tips

Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only
voice commands are available.

On*1/Off

Background Color

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch screen.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green

Header Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on or not.

On*1/Off

System Device Information

Displays the system/Device information.

Features

Other

Factory Data Reset
Default
*1:Default Setting

306

Selectable Settings

Auto Daylight *
Clock

System
Settings

Description

* Not available on all models

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 316

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.

On*1/Off
—

—
—
Default/OK

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

307 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Driver
Assist
System
Setup

Selectable Settings

Forward Collision Warning
Distance

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.

Long*1/Normal/
Short/Off

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few
degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A *, and
elapsed time A *.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B *, and
elapsed time B *.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance
Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

Meter
Setup

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Description

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

307

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

308 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Driving
Position
Setup

Keyless
Access
Setup
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Lighting
Setup

*1:Default Setting

308

Description

Selectable Settings

Memory Position Link

Changes the driver’s seat and door mirror
positions to a stored setting.

On*1/Off

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Drivers Door Only*1/
All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/
lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.

60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

309 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.

Driver Door with Shift
to P*1/All Doors with
Shift to P/Driver Door
with IGN Off/All Doors
with IGN Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All
Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors and the
tailgate to relock and the security system to set
after you unlock the vehicle without opening any
door or the tailgate.

90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1

Maintenance
Info.

Maintenance Reset

Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.

Auto Door Lock

Door
Setup

Description

—

Default/OK

*1:Default Setting

Continued

309

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

310 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Show with Turn Signal

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.

On*1/Off

Reference Lines

Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Next Maneuver Pop up

Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts on the LaneWatch
display.

On*1/Off

Features

LaneWatch

Brightness
Contrast

Camera
Settings

Display

Black Level

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.

—

Color
Tint

Rear
Camera

*1:Default Setting

310

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Default/OK

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or
not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
or not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.

Default/OK

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

311 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sound

Source Select Popup
CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod®, USB, Pandora®
or AhaTM mode

Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 222

Selectable Settings
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,
Treble, Fader, Balance
and Subwoofer), Off/
Low/Mid*1/High (SVC)

Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed.

On/Off*1

Turns on and off the cover art display.

On*1/Off

Cover Art
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Bluetooth Device List
CD mode

Recording from CD
CD mode

Recording Quality

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.

—

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.

—

Features

Audio
Settings

Description

Selects whether the songs on music CDs are
automatically recorded to the HDD or not.

Auto*1/Manual

Selects the quality of the music files recorded to
the HDD.

Standard*1/High

*1:Default Setting

Continued

311

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

312 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
HDD mode

Displays the HDD capacity.

HDD Info
CD or HDD mode

Gracenote Album DB Info Update
CD or HDD mode

Audio
Settings

Description

Update Gracenote Album Info
HDD mode

Features

Delete all HDD Data

Connect phone

—

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database).

Update from USB*1/
Update from CD

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database).

Update by USB*1/
Update by CD

2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 317

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.

Default

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—
Default/OK

—

2 Phone Setup P. 373

Phone
Settings

Phone

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 373

Edit Speed Dial
*1:Default Setting

312

* Not available on all models

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Phone Setup P. 373

—

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

313 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Phone

Selectable Settings

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

On*1/Off

Auto Answer

Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.

On/Off*1

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo

Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.

On*1/Off

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text message/E-mail function on and
off.

On*1/Off

Select Account

Selects a mail or text message account.

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message/Email.

Features

Auto Transfer

Phone
Settings

Text/
Email

Description

—
On/Off*1

*1:Default Setting

Continued

313

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

314 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * u

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Clock

Clock Format

See System Settings on P. 304 to P. 306.

Auto Time Zone *
Features

Auto Daylight *

Info
Settings

Clock Reset

Other

INFO Screen Preference

Default
*1:Default Setting

314

* Not available on all models

Selects the top menu when the INFO button is
pressed.
● Info Top- A brief menu pops up.
● Info Menu- A full menu pops up.
● Off- A menu does not pop up.

Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.

Default/OK

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

315 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * uDefaulting All the Settings

Models without navigation system

Defaulting All the Settings

1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.

Features

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory Data Reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to
reset the settings.
5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.

315

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

316 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * uDefaulting All the Settings

Models with navigation system

Defaulting All the Settings

Features

316

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Other, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Factory Data Reset,
then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.

1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
• Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search
Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
• Route Preference

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

317 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features * uDeleting all HDD Data

Models with navigation system

Deleting all HDD Data
Reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.
1. Turn on the audio system and select the
HDD mode.
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete all HDD Data,
then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
Features

317

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

318 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.

■ Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s
path.

Training HomeLink
Red Indicator

318

* Not available on all models

If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

319 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

■ Training a Button

1Training a Button

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
blink after 10 secs?

YES

Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

NO
Standard transmitter

YES

a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Does the LED blink within 20 secs?

NO
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

Training
Complete

HomeLink LED
is on.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete

HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).

Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.

Rolling code transmitter

Indicator blinks rapidly for
2 secs, then remains on for
about 23 secs.

2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and
follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”

Features

3. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?

Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

319

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

320 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models without navigation system

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Models without touch screen

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

Voice control tips
• Adjust or close the vents and all windows, as noise
coming from them may interfere with the
microphone.

Volume up
Features

• Press and release the

(HFL Talk)
Button

Volume down

Microphone

(HFL Back) Button

Button: Press to give a command or answer a call.
Button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a
command.

320

button before giving a
command. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• A command that consists of several words can be
spoken together. For example, say “Call 123-4567890” at once.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

321 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ Help Features

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

• To hear general HFL information and help, say “Tutorial.”
• Say “Hands-free help” or “Help” any time to get help or hear a list of commands.

■ HFL Status Display
The audio display notifies you when there is
an incoming call.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Features

Phone Dialing

321

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

322 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

Press the

(HFL Talk) button each time you give a command.

“Phone setup”

Features
“Call”/“Dial”

322

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

“Pair”

Pair a phone to the system.

“Edit”

Edit the name of a paired phone.

“Delete”

Delete a paired phone from the system.

“List”

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system.

“Status”

Hear which paired phone is linked, and its remaining battery life.

“Next phone”

Search for another phone that has been paired.

“Set pairing code”

Set the pairing code to either “Fixed” or “Random.”

e.g.: “123-456-####”

Say a phone number.

e.g.: “Jim Smith”

Say a name after a phonebook entry is stored.

“Redial”

Redial the last number called.

“Transfer”

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone or from your phone to HFL.

“Mute”

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call.

“Send”

Send numbers or names during a call.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

323 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

“Phonebook”

Store a phonebook entry.

“Edit”

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry.

“Delete”

Delete a phonebook entry.

“List”

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries.

“Receive contact” *

Transfer contacts from your phone to HFL.

“Security”

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system.

“Change passcode”

Change your security passcode.

“Call notification”

Set how you want to be notified of an incoming call.

“Auto transfer”

Set to automatically transfer calls from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle.

“Clear”

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security
passcode.

Features

“System setup”

“Store”

Canadian models

“Change language” *

Switch the system language between English and French.

“Tutorial”

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system.

“Hands-free help”

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command.

* Not available on all models

Continued

323

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

324 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup
■ To pair a cell phone
1. If no phone has been paired to the system before, HFL gives you information
about how to pair the first phone.
If a phone has already been paired: say “Phone Setup” and “Pair” after the HFL
prompts.
2. Follow the HFL prompts and put your phone in discovery or search mode.
u HFL gives you a four-digit code and begins searching for your phone.
3. When your phone finds a Bluetooth® device, select HFL from the options and
enter the four-digit code.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and name the newly paired phone.
Features

■ To rename a paired phone
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Edit” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and rename the phone.
u If there is more than one phone paired to the system, HFL asks you which
phone’s name you want to change.

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Delete” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.
u HFL asks you which phone you want to delete.

324

1Phone Setup
Press the
button and wait for a beep before
giving a command.
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Your phone must be in the discoverable or search
mode when pairing the phone. Refer to your
phone’s manual.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

325 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To hear the name of all paired phone
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “List” after the prompts.
3. HFL reads out all the paired phone’s names.

1Phone Setup
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL informs you that the
original phone is linked again.
The “Status” and “Next Phone” commands use:
Only one paired phone at a time can be linked to HFL.
When there are two or more paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone that the system finds is
linked.

■ To hear which paired phone is currently linked
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Status” after the prompts.
3. HFL tells you which phone is linked with the system.

■ To change the currently linked phone
Features

1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Next Phone” after the prompts.
3. HFL disconnects the current phone, and searches for another paired phone.
4. Once another phone is found, it is connected to the system. HFL informs you
which phone is now linked.

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Say “Phone Setup.”
2. Say “Set Pairing Code” after the prompts.
3. If you want HFL to create a random code each time you pair a phone, say
“Random.” If you want to create your own four-digit code, say “Fixed.”
4. Follow the HFL prompts.

Continued

325

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

326 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call
You can make calls using any phone number or a name in the HFL phonebook, and
redial the last number called.

Press the
button and wait for a beep before
giving a command.

■ Direct dialing a phone number

HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, with has a maximum
range of about 30 feet (10 meters).

1. Say “Call” or “Dial.”
2. Say the number you want to dial after the prompts.
3. Say “Call” or “Dial” after the prompts.

HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you
remove the key from the ignition switch. However,
this may weaken the vehicle’s battery.

■ From the HFL phonebook
Features

1. Say “Call” or “Dial.”
2. Say the name stored in the HFL phonebook after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.

■ To redial the last number called by HFL
Say “Redial.”

■ To end a call
Press the

326

1Making a Call

(HFL back) button.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

327 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Press the
button to answer the call, or the
button to hang up. When there is
an incoming call, a call notification (if activated) sounds.

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.

■ Transferring a Call

Press the
call.

You can transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL. Press the
button and say “Transfer.”

■ Muting a Call
button and say

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current and answer the incoming call.
Features

To mute or unmute your voice during a call, press and release the
“Mute.”

button again to return to the current

Continued

327

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

328 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Sending Numbers or Name During a Call
You can send numbers and names during a call. This is useful when calling a menudriven phone system.

1Sending Numbers or Name During a Call
Press the

button before a command.

To send a

, say “Pound.” To send a

, say “Star.”

■ To send a number or name during a call
1. Say “Send.”
2. Say the number or name you want to send after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.

■ HFL Phonebook
Features

You can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers in HFL. The numbers
you store can be account numbers or passwords. These numbers can be sent to a
menu-driven call.

■ To store a phonebook entry
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Store” after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to list as your phonebook entry.
4. Say the number you want to store for the name entry.
5. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry.

■ To edit the number stored for a name
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Edit” after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to edit. When asked, say the new number for that name.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry.

328

1HFL Phonebook

• Avoid using duplicate name entries.
• Avoid using “home” as a name entry.
• It is easier for HFL to recognize a multisyllabic or
longer name. For example, use “Peter” instead of
“Pete,” or “John Smith” instead of “John.”

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

329 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a name
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Delete” after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to delete.
4. Say “Yes,” and follow the HFL prompts.
■ To list all names in the phonebook
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “List” after the prompts.
3. HFL begins reading the names in the order they were stored.
4. When you hear a name you want to call, say “Call.”

phonebook *
1. Say “Phonebook.”
2. Say “Receive Contact” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a number from your cell phone, and send it to HFL.
u If it is not the number you want to store, say “Discard.”
4. Say the name for that number.
5. Follow the HFL prompts to continue.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Features

■ To store a specific phone number from your cell phone directly to the HFL

329

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

330 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ System Setup
This command group allows you to change or customize HFL basic settings.

■ To set a four-digit passcode to lock the HFL system for security
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Security.”
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say the four-digit number of your choice.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and confirm the number.

■ To change the security passcode
Features

1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Change Passcode” after the prompts.
3. Say the new four-digit passcode after the HFL prompts.
4. Follow the HFL prompts.

■ To select a ring tone or a prompt as the incoming call notification
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Call Notification” after the prompts.
3. Say “Ring Tone” or “Prompt” after the prompts. For no audible notification, say
“Off.”

330

1System Setup
Press the

button before a command.

Once a passcode is set, you are required to enter the
passcode with every new key cycle to use HFL.
If you forget the code, go to your dealer to have the
passcode reset. You can also cancel the passcode by
clearing all the data stored in the HFL system.
2 To clear the system P. 331
The default setting of the incoming notification is a
ring tone.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

331 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To activate or deactivate the auto transfer function
The call on your cell phone can be automatically transferred to HFL when you get
into the vehicle and turn on the ignition.
1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Auto Transfer” after the prompts. HFL lets you know the current status.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to change the setting.

1System Setup
Press the

button before a command.

You can clear the system when you have forgotten
the passcode and cannot access HFL.
When HFL asks you for the passcode, say “System
Clear.”

■ To clear the system
Paired phones, all stored or imported phonebook data, and any passcodes are
erased.
Features

1. Say “System Setup.”
2. Say “Clear” after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts.

■ Change Language *
You can set the system language to French or English.
1. Say “Change Language.”
2. Follow the HFL prompts.

1Change Language *
Press the

button before a command.

Quick Language Selection
If you want to change the language, to French for
example, say “Français,” and follow the prompt.

If you have not named your paired phone in the selected language, HFL will ask you
to name it in that language.

* Not available on all models

331

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

332 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models without navigation system

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Models with touch screen

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

Volume up

Features

Pick-up
Button

Microphone
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button

DISP
Button
MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

(Pick-up) button: Press to display the phone menu on half of the screen, or to
answer an incoming call.

332

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
MENU/SEL (Selector) knob: Rotate
to select an item on the audio/information
screen, then press .
To go to the Phone screen:
1. Press the DISP button to switch the display to the Function Change screen.
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
* Not available on all models

Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

333 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator

Battery Level
Status

Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.

Roam Status

HFL Mode

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.

Disabled Options

Features

1HFL Status Display

You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 350

* Not available on all models

333

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

334 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.

■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .

Features

Connect
Phone*2

(Existing entry list)
Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect

Bluetooth
Device List

(Existing
entry list)*2

Add
Bluetooth
Device

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

Connect a phone to the system.
Pair a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit PIN
Replace This
Device

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.

Delete This
Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Pair a phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

334

1HFL Menus

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

335 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a
New Entry

speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Import from
Call History

Edit
Phone

Edit Speed
Dial*1

●

Delete

Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone

Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.

Features

Delete All

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●

(Existing
entry list)

Automatic Phone Sync*1 Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
Use Contact Photo

HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued

335

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

336 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Enable Text/Email
Text/Email

Select Account *
New Text/Email Alert
Message Auto Reading

Default

Select a mail or text message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text message/E-mail.
Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text
message/E-mail.

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Features

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

336

Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

337 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone screen
1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press

Dial*1
Redial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All
Dialed
Received
Missed

Speed Dial*1

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.

New Entry

Manual Input
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook

(Existing entry list)
More Speed Dials

Features

Call
History*1

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued

337

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

338 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook*1
Text/Email*1

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Select Account *

Select a mail or text message account.

Read/Stop

Select a message
and press .
Features

Message is read
aloud.

Next Message
Reply
Call

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

338

Previous Message

* Not available on all models

System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
See the previous message.
See the next message.
Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

339 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 337

Continued

Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

Features

2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 349

339

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

340 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

Features

340

2. Rotate
to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

341 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.
4. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .

1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

Edit Pairing Code

Features

Continued

341

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

342 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

Features

342

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

343 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

Continued

Features

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.

343

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

344 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up a Text Message/Email Options
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

Features

344

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

345 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
1. On the Text/Email screen, rotate
to
select New Text/Email Alert, then press
.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

Continued

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.
Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when
driving.

Features

■ To set up the auto reading option
1. On the Text Message or the Text/Email
screen, rotate
to select Message Auto
Reading, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto then
press .

1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

345

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

346 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

Features

346

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Edit PIN, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate
to select, then press .
Select
to delete. Select OK to enter
the security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

347 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .

Features

■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .

Continued

347

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

348 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
3. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .

Features

348

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

349 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

Work

Message

setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

Pager

Voice

2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

Continued

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.

Features

Pref

The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

349

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

350 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone screen.

Features

350

Mr.AAA

111AAA####

Mr.BBB

222BBB####

Mr.CCC

333CCC####

Mr.DDD

444DDD####

Mr.EEE

555EEE####

Select a method to store

2 Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

351 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

Continued

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

351

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

352 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

Features

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

352

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

353 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the voice tag
name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or
the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
Features

Continued

353

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

354 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 337

Features

354

2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a name, then press .
u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 333
2 Speed Dial P. 350

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

355 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone screen.

1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 333
2 Speed Dial P. 350

2 Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone screen.

1To make a call using redial

2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

Features

Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.

2 Phone screen P. 337

355

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

356 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select All, Dialed, Received,
or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Features

356

1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

357 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Select More Speed Dials to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that
list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 350

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
Features

Continued

357

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

358 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the
Press the

Features

358

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

359 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
Mute Icon
half of the screen.

Continued

Features

Rotate
to select the option, then press .
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

359

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

360 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

HFL can also display E-mails.

Features

360

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or E-mail.
2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message or E-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/
E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text message or E-mail for the
first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to
On.
2 To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
P. 345

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

361 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Rotate
to select Select Account on the top of the
list, then press .

2 Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account.
3. Rotate
to select Text message or an
E-mail account you want, then press .

Message List

Features

You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

Continued

361

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

362 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

1Displaying Messages

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Go to the Phone screen.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

2 Phone screen P. 337

Features

362

Text Message

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, press
on the
text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message,
then press .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

363 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

■ Displaying E-mails
1. Go to the Phone screen.

1Displaying E-mails

2 Phone screen P. 337

Message List

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Rotate
to select a folder, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The E-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.

Received text messages and E-mails may appear in
the message list screen at the same time. In this case,
text messages are titled No Subject.

Features

E-mail

Continued

363

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

364 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Using the Stop or Read option
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 362

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select Stop or Read, then
press .

Features

364

1Using the Stop or Read option
This option changes to:
• Stop while the text message/E-mail is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message read
out.
• Read when the system has finished reading out the
text message/E-mail, or after you selected Stop.
Select this option to hear the system read out the
selected message.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

365 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 362

Continued

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

Features

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select Reply, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

365

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

366 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying text messages P. 362

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select Call, then press .

Features

366

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

367 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models with navigation system

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons
Volume up

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)
528-7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.
2 Customized Features * P. 281
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.

Microphone
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button

PHONE
Button
Interface Dial

(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Phone Call screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Interface dial: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press . Move
, or to select secondary menu.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Features

Pick-up
Button

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

367

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

368 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator

Battery Level
Status

Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.

Roam Status

HFL Mode

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number

HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

Features

1HFL Status Display

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.

Disabled Option

Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 385

368

* Not available on all models

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

369 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.

1HFL Menus

■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .

(Existing entry list) Connect a phone to the system.
Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect

Pair a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit Device
Name

(Existing
entry list)*2
Bluetooth
Device List
Add Bluetooth
Device

Edit the user name of a paired phone.

Replace This
Device

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.

Delete This
Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Edit PIN

Features

Phone

Connect
phone*2

Pair a phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued

369

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

370 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Delete All

Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.
Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed

dial number.
Edit Speed
Dial*1

New Entry

Import from Select a phone number from the call
Call History history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit

(Existing
entry list)

●
●

Delete
Features

Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync

Text/Email

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.

Use Contact Photo
Default

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Select Account
New Text/Email Alert

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

370

Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

Enable Text/Email
*1

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new
text message/E-mail.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

371 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.

Dial*1

Features

Phonebook*1

Enter a phone number to dial.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Manual Input
New Entry

Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook

Speed Dial*1

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

More Speed Dials

Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued

371

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

372 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All

Call History*1

Dialed
Received
Missed

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Read/Stop)

Features

Select a message
and press .
Message is
read aloud.
Text/Email*1

System reads received message aloud, or stop message
from being read.
See the previous message.

See the next message.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Call

Make a call to the sender.

Select Account Select a mail or text message account.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

372

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

373 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no

Continued

Features

phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.

373

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

374 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

Features

374

already been paired to the system)
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Connect
Phone, then Add Bluetooth Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

375 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Pairing Code.
3. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .

Features

Continued

375

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

376 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To replace an already-paired phone

Features

376

with a new phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

377 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.

377

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

378 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail
function
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.
Features

378

■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Text/Email Alert.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new text message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

379 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To set up the auto reading option
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Message
Auto Reading.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto, then
press .

1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.
Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when
driving.

Features

Continued

379

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

380 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Create a Security PIN

Features

380

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Edit PIN, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
to select
OK to enter the security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.

1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

381 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Editing User Name

Continued

Features

Edit the user name of a paired phone as
follows:
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Edit Device Name,
then press .
5. Enter a new name of the phone.
u Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
or move
to select OK then press
to enter the
name.

381

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

382 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .

Features

■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .

382

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

383 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
3. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

Features

Continued

383

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

384 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
Features

384

setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Message

Pager

Voice

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

385 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Continued

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

385

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

386 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed

Features

386

dial number
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

387 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
Continued

387

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

388 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Features

388

Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press
.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

389 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

5. Rotate
to select New Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Move
or
and rotate
to select a
contact name, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate
to select Modify, then press .
8. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
9. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .
Features

Continued

389

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

390 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To modify a voice tag

Features

390

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to modify, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Modify, then press .
7. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You cannot modify or delete a contact name if it is
edited with a phone other than the phone connected
to HFL.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

391 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
7. Move and rotate
to select OK, then
press .

391

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

392 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete all modified voice tags
Connect phone

Phone#1
Phone#2
Phone#3

Connect phone

Features

392

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
u The contact name list appears.
5. Move and rotate
to select Delete All,
then press .
6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

393 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Continued

393

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

394 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Move to Search.
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Features

394

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 368
2 Speed Dial P. 385

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

395 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 368
2 Speed Dial P. 385

1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.

Continued

Features

■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

395

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

396 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the call history
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
Features

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
These icons next to the number indicate the
following:
: Dialed calls.
: Received calls.
: Missed calls.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another
paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call
from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 385

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

396

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

397 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
Press the
Press the

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.

Features

Continued

397

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

398 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the Phone
Mute Icon
screen.
Rotate
to select the option, then press .
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Features

398

1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

399 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

Continued

The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and E-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/
E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text message or E-mail for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to
On.
2 To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
P. 378

Features

HFL can display newly received text messages and E-mails as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or E-mail.
2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message or E-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.

399

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

400 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Mail Account
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account.
3. Rotate
to select Text message or an Email account you want, then press .

1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Move to select Select Account, then press .

Features
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

400

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

401 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Select account if necessary.
4. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

Continued

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, move
on the text message screen.

Features

Text Message

1Displaying Messages

401

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

402 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

Message List
Features
E-mail

402

■ Displaying E-mails
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a folder, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The E-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.

1Displaying E-mails
Received text messages and E-mails may appear in
the message list screen at the same time. In this case,
text messages are titled No subject.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

403 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Read or stop reading a message
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 401

2. Press
to stop reading.
Press
again to start reading the message
from the beginning.

2 Displaying Messages P. 401

2. Move and rotate
to select Reply,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

Continued

1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No

Features

■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

403

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

404 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
John 0123456789####

Features

404

2 Displaying text messages P. 401
Call

2. Move
press

and rotate
.

to select Call, then

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

405 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Compass *
Canadian models

1Compass *

Models without audio touch screen

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , the compass self-calibrates, and the
compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

Compass Setting Menu Items

Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass:
• The RETURN button returns to the previous screen.
• The MENU button cancels the setting mode.

Features

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press and hold the MENU button until the
display shows the compass setting menu
list.
3. Rotate
to select CALIBRATION, then
press .

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press to enter.

4. When the display changes to PUSH CAL
START, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.

* Not available on all models

405

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

406 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press and hold the MENU button until the
display shows the compass setting menu
list.
3. Rotate
to select ZONE, then press .
The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate
to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press
.

Zone Number

Zone Map
Features

15
14

2
3

13
12

4
11
5
6
7

Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11

406

1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

407 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Compass *
Models with audio touch screen

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, the compass self-calibrates, and the
compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, press the BACK button to
cancel the setting mode and return to the previous
screen.

Features

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for 5 seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Calibration, then press
.
4. When the display changes to Calibration
Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.

1Compass *

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

407

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

408 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for 5 seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Zone Adjust, then
press .
u The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate
to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .
Features

Zone Map

15
14

2
3

13
12

4
11
5
6
7

Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

408

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

409 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 410
Maximum Load Limit........................ 413
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 415
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 418
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 419
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 420
Precautions While Driving................. 424
Automatic Transmission ................... 425
Shifting ............................................ 426

* Not available on all models

Cruise Control ................................. 432
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * .. 435
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * ..... 439
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System.. 442
LaneWatchTM * .................................. 444
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .. 446
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 447
Braking
Brake System ................................... 449
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 451

Brake Assist System ......................... 452
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 453
Rearview Camera ............................. 454
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 455
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 456
How to Refuel ................................. 457
Fuel Economy.................................... 459
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 459
Accessories and Modifications ........ 460

409

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

410 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving

410

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 497

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

411 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

■ Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 99

• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.

Driving

• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 133
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 136

• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 129
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 130

Continued

411

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

412 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35

• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 70

Driving

412

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

413 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

1Maximum Load Limit

3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.

Label Example

Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

Continued

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 546, 548

Driving

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 546, 548

413

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

414 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)

Example2

414

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

415 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
■ Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Continued

3 WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600
miles (1,000 km).

Driving

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for 6-cylinder
models and 1,000 lbs (453 kg) for 4-cylinder
models. Towing loads in excess of this can
seriously affect vehicle handling and
performance and can damage the engine and
Total Load
drivetrain.
■ Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
Tongue Load
Load
Tongue
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 546, 548

415

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

416 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

■ Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.

■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■ Trailer brakes

Driving

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.

■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

416

1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

417 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

■ Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Ground (Black)

Left Turn Signal (Blue)

Right Turn Signal (Green)

Taillight (Red)

Trailer (Yellow)

Brake Light (Light Green)

When using a non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, get the connector
and pins for your vehicle from a dealer.

Driving

Your trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area.
Each pin’s purpose and wiring color code are shown in the image.

417

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

418 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving Safely with a Trailer
■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 415

• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

■ Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving

• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
• Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

■ Turning and Braking
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.

418

1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

419 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

■ Driving in Hilly Terrain
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
heating and cooling system */climate control system * and reduce speed. Pull to the
side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
• Shift to the (S or (d position if the transmission shifts frequently.

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 542

Driving

* Not available on all models

419

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

420 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

When Driving
Models without smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).

Brake Pedal

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system */climate control system *, and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

Driving

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be charged to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.

420

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

421 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

■ Starting to Drive
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.

1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 107

2 Parking Brake P. 449
Driving

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

421

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

422 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Models with smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .
Driving
Brake Pedal

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 107

422

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

423 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 526
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.

■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

■ Starting to Drive

Driving

1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 449

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

423

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

424 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or
LOCK (0 *1 while driving, the engine will shut down
and all steering and brake power assist functions will
stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

Driving

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

424

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

425 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission

Automatic Transmission
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

Driving

425

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

426 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Automatic transmission models without paddle shifters

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■ Shift lever positions

Release Button

Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling

Driving

Drive
Used for normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 5th automatically)
Drive (D3)
Used:
● When going up or down hills
● When towing a trailer in hilly terrain
Second
Used to increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)

426

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
The engine may cut in and out in (R or depending on
the road condition, even when the engine speed is
lower than the tachometer’s red zone. This is the
engine’s computer working to protect the
transmission.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

427 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Shift Lever Position Indicator
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission
problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Driving

Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

427

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

428 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Automatic transmission models with paddle shifters

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■ Shift lever positions

Release Button

Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling

Driving

Drive
Used:
● For normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 6th automatically)
● When temporarily driving in the
sequential mode
Drive (S)
Used:
● When automatically changing gears
between 1st and 5th (5th gear is used
only at high speed)
● When driving in the sequential mode
● When towing a trailer in hilly terrain
● To increase engine braking

428

You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
The engine may cut in and out in (R or depending on
the road condition, even when the engine speed is
lower than the tachometer’s red zone. This is the
engine’s computer working to protect the
transmission.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

429 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission
problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

M (Sequential Shift mode)
Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

Continued

Driving

Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.

429

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

430 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Sequential Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your
hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift
mode.

■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position
indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will
automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.
Driving

■ When the shift lever is (S
in:
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode)
indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or
less, the vehicle automatically shifts down into 1st gear. If you do not operate the
paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission automatically shifts up to 2nd gear.
Once in 2nd gear, the transmission must be manually upshifted to the remaining
gears using the [+] paddle shifter.

You can only pull away in 1st or 2nd gear.
When switching out of the sequential
shift mode, move the shift lever from S
( to
(D. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position
indicator go off.

430

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

431 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Second gear lock mode
If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,
the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on
slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever
from (S to (D .

■ Sequential Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter

(Shift down)

1Sequential Shift Mode Operation

(+ Paddle Shifter

(Shift up)

Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
To change gears continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear.)

Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter.
(Changes to a higher gear.)

Normal Acceleration
17.4 mph (28.0 km/h)
27.1 mph (43.6 km/h)
35.7 mph (57.5 km/h)
41.0 mph (66.0 km/h)
44.2 mph (71.1 km/h)

Driving

Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.

The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot
shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed
is not in its allowable gear shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.

431

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

432 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
When to use
■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
■ Shift positions for cruise control:

1Cruise Control

3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.

Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.

Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.

Models without paddle shifters

In (D or (d

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.

Models with paddle shifters

In (D or (S
How to use
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Driving

432

Cruise control is ready to use.

■ Press the CRUISE button on
the steering wheel.

When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

433 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button

Press and release
On

On when cruise control begins

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.

Continued

Driving

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

433

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

434 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.

You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Driving

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
1To Cancel

■ To Cancel

CRUISE
Button
CANCEL
Button

To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

434

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

435 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Alerts you when it detects the possibility of your vehicle colliding with the vehicle in
front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts.
uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).

■ How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:

NORMAL
SHORT

Your Vehicle

* Not available on all models

Vehicle Ahead

Continued

Driving

For the FCW system to work properly:
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2 LDW Camera P. 440

LONG

435

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

436 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Camera-based system
The camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.

Beep

Driving

436

* Not available on all models

The beeper sounds and
the FCW indicator blinks
until a possible collision
is avoided.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

437 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

■ Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on
when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.

1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a
reflective sunshade that can concentrate heat on the
camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW system.
Driving

Continued

437

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

438 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

■ FCW Limitations
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead
of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●

Driving

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

438

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a tractor.
When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly
detect a vehicle in front of you.
When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned out.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

439 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over left or right side lane markings.

■ How the System Works
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator
blinks, letting you know that you need to take
appropriate action.

1Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

439

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

440 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

■ How the System Activates
The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between at 40-90 mph (64-145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not pressed.

■ LDW Camera
LDW Camera

The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.

Driving

■ LDW On and Off
LDW Button
Indicator

440

Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
uThe indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.

1How the System Activates
LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 77
1LDW Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off,
when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the
vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a reflective
sunshade that can concentrate heat on the camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the LDW system.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

441 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

■ LDW Limitations
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●
●

Driving

●

When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer.
When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
u The camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.
When the road has many repaired area or an erased lane line.
When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.
When you drive in a lane with specific lane markups (e.g., Botts’ dots).

441

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

442 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic
Stability Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.

Driving

442

VSA® System Indicator

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

443 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the
button until you hear a beep.

(VSA® OFF)

VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.

Driving

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure, or TPMS indicator comes on
or blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the

button.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

443

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

444 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

LaneWatchTM *
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas
and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of the
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
driving.
The system activates when you:
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.

Press the LaneWatch
button.

The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.

3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.

Driving

Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.

The system deactivates when you:
Pull the turn signal
lever back.

1LaneWatchTM *

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

Press the LaneWatch
button again.

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen slightly look
different from what they are.

Audio/Information Screen

444

* Not available on all models

LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R .
Camera

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

445 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Next Maneuver Pop up *: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.

1LaneWatchTM *
For a proper LaneWatch use:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of
debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.

2 Customized Features * P. 281

■ Reference Lines

2
1

Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close
to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually
confirm the safety of a lane change before changing
lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road condition
and vehicle loading. For example, reference lines on
the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual
distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.

Driving

1Reference Lines

Consult a dealer if:
• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

* Not available on all models

445

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

446 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are
driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes
significantly low, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on.

1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure indicator to come on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes
On P. 537
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.

Driving

446

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

447 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

U.S. models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Continued

447

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

448 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is provided by a separate telltale,
which displays the symbol “TPMS” when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,

Driving

the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

448

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

449 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.

NOTICE

Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.

Continued

Driving

To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.

449

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

450 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 452
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 451

1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear.

Driving

450

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

451 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When tire chains are installed.

Driving

■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

451

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

452 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Driving

452

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

453 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
4. Turn off the engine.

1Parking Your Vehicle

Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1When Stopped

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
Driving

453

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

454 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Rearview Camera
About Your Rearview Camera
Models without touch screen

1About Your Rearview Camera

An image of the rear view is shown in your vehicle’s rearview mirror when the shift
lever is moved to (R .

■ Rearview Camera Display Area

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive on before
backing up. Do not rely on the rearview display,
which does not give you complete information.

Screen display

Guide lines
Bumper

The rear camera view is restricted.
You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper and
what is underneath the bumper.

Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Camera
Driving

Approx. 7.8 in (0.2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)

Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view.
Use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can select to have the guide lines appearing on
the rearview camera display while the shift lever is in
(R . Press the Auto button for about five seconds to
turn them on or off.
The rearview display is turned on every time you shift
to (R .
Rearview Camera
Display

The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further
than they actually are.

Auto Button

Sensor:
Adjusts
the display
brightness.

The rearview mirror gets hot if the rearview display is
used for an extended period.

454

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

455 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with touch screen

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .

■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines

Bumper

Normal View Mode

Camera

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Top Down View Mode

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

Driving

Approx. 20 in (50 cm)

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
MENU/SEL (Selector) knob or the interface dial to switch the angle.

Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.

* Not available on all models

455

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

456 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.

■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Driving

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 liters)

456

1Fuel Information
NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

457 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Unlock the driver’s door using the lock tab
or the master door lock switch.
u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the
vehicle will unlock.

Press

Fuel Fill Door

4. Press the area indicated by the arrow to
release the fuel fill door. You will hear a
click.

1How to Refuel

3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.

Driving

Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to
unlock the fuel fill door.
The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically
relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can
be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the
driver’s door.
NOTICE

The fuel fill door and its latching mechanism can be
permanently damaged if the fuel fill door is forced
closed when the driver’s door is locked.

Continued

457

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

458 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

5. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

Driving

458

Holder

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

Cap
Cap

1How to Refuel

6. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
7. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
8. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

459 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven

Gallons of
fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Driving

459

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

460 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
(FCW) *

2 Forward Collision Warning
P. 435
2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * P. 439

• Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 538

• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

Driving

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.

460

* Not available on all models

1Accessories and Modifications

3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

461 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 462
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 463

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 464
Maintenance Minder™ .................... 465
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 469

Opening the Hood ........................... 471
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 472
Oil Check ......................................... 473
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 475
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ....476

* Not available on all models

Engine Coolant ................................ 478
Transmission Fluid............................ 480
Brake Fluid....................................... 481
Power Steering Fluid Check * ............ 482
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 483
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 484
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades ... 493

Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 497
Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 498

Tire Labeling .................................... 498
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......500

Tire Service Life................................ 502
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 503
Tire Rotation.................................... 504
Winter Tires ..................................... 505
Battery............................................... 506
Remote Transmitter Care................. 507
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 507
Heating and Cooling System */Climate
Control System * Maintenance....... 509
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 510
Exterior Care.................................... 512

Wear Indicators................................ 502

461

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

462 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.

■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 481

• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 497
Maintenance

462

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 467
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 557

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 484

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 493

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

463 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.

■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.

3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

■ Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

463

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

464 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

Maintenance

464

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

465 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Maintenance Minder™
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press the
(Select/Reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

Maintenance

Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

465

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

466 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display

(Select/Reset) knob.
Explanation

Information

The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.

The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.

Maintenance Minder Indicator

Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts The engine oil has almost reached
It goes off when the display is
to appear along with the engine oil the end of its service life, and the
switched.
life indicator and the maintenance maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
item codes.
possible.

Maintenance

466

Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

467 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items
System Message
Indicator

1Maintenance Service Items

• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000

Maintenance Minder
Message

km).

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Main
Item

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●
●

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●
●

5
6

●
●

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer*4 fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*5, *6
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid*4

Maintenance

●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#

Sub Items

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: 4WD only
*5: 6-cylinder models
*6: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under
-20°F, -29°C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

Continued

467

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

468 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the
(Select/Reset) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for ten seconds
or more.
u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the
knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.

Maintenance
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

468

* Not available on all models

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Models with audio/information screen

You can reset the engine oil life display using the
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features * P. 281

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

469 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
4-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)

Power Steering Fluid
(Red Cap)
Battery

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Maintenance

Engine Coolant
Reservoir
Radiator Cap

Continued

469

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

470 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)

Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Battery
Engine Coolant
Reservoir
Maintenance
Radiator Cap

470

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

471 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.

1Opening the Hood
NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.

Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Lever

When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.

Maintenance

4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.

471

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

472 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

472

1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

473 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
4-cylinder models
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.

6-cylinder models

Maintenance

Continued

473

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

474 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

4-cylinder models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
6-cylinder models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Maintenance

474

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

475 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.

4-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Maintenance

475

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

476 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display */multi-information display *.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
4-cylinder models
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
Washer
fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
Drain Bolt
6-cylinder models

Maintenance

476

Washer

Drain Bolt

* Not available on all models

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

477 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

4-cylinder models

Oil Filter

6-cylinder models

Oil Filter

4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.

4-cylinder models

4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
Maintenance

6-cylinder models

4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

477

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

478 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

■ Reserve Tank
4-cylinder models

Maintenance

Reserve
Tank

MAX

MIN

MAX

478

NOTICE

If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.

6-cylinder models

Reserve
Tank

1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.

1Engine Coolant

MIN

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

479 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

■ Radiator
4-cylinder models

Radiator Cap

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and
relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.

Maintenance

6-cylinder models

1Radiator

Radiator Cap

479

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

480 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Maintenance

480

1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda’s new vehicle warranty.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

481 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

1Brake Fluid
NOTICE

■ Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.

MAX
MIN

Brake Reservoir

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.

Maintenance

481

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

482 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduPower Steering Fluid Check *

Power Steering Fluid Check *
4-cylinder models

Specified fluid: Honda Power Steering Fluid
We recommend that you check the power steering fluid level every time you refuel.
Check when the engine is not running.
1. Look at the side of the reservoir. The fluid
should be between the UPPER LEVEL and
UPPER
LOWER LEVEL.
LEVEL
2. Add power steering fluid if necessary to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
uInspect the system for a leak. If the fluid
level goes below the LOWER LEVEL
frequently, have the system inspected as
LOWER
LEVEL
soon as possible.

Maintenance

482

* Not available on all models

1Power Steering Fluid Check *
NOTICE

Turning the steering wheel to full left or right lock
and holding it there can damage the power steering
pump.
NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine compartment.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

483 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on the
cap.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Canadian models

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator comes on.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.

Level Gauge

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Maintenance

483

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

484 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
High beam headlight: 60W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
Low beam headlight: 55W (H11 for halogen bulb type)

■ High Beam Headlight
Passenger side

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.

1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Coupler
Bulb
Maintenance

484

Tab

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

The exterior lights’ inside lenses (headlights, brake
lights, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or
while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
exterior light function.
However, if you see a large amount of water or ice
accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

485 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

■ Low Beam Headlights
Holding
Clip

Screw

1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clip and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.
3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Bulb

Tab

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
central pin to remove the clip.
Central pin

Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Push until the
pin is flat.

Maintenance

Coupler

1Headlight Bulbs

485

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

486 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs

Fog Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)
Passenger side

Under Cover
Holding Clips

1. Remove the holding clips, then push up the
under cover.

1Fog Light Bulbs
NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Remove the clip by using a flat-tip screwdriver.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 485

Coupler
Bulb

Maintenance

486

Tab

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

487 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs

Holding Clip

Driver side

1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.

1Fog Light Bulbs
Remove the clip by using a flat-tip screwdriver.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 485

Screw

Bulb

Coupler

3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Tab
Maintenance

487

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

488 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulb

Front Side Marker Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Remove the clip by using a flat-tip screwdriver.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 485

Front Side Marker Light: 5 W
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.

Holding Clip

Screw
Bulb

Maintenance

488

Socket

1Front Side Marker Light Bulb

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

489 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Parking: 24/2.2CP
Holding Clip

Driver side
6-cylinder models

1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct and the air
intake tube.
Tube

Holding Clip
Passenger side
All models

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.

Maintenance

Continued

489

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

490 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillights, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until
it unlocks, and remove.
4. Insert new bulb.

Socket

Bulb

Brake/Taillights, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal
Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Maintenance

Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Back-Up Light: 21 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Maker Light: 3 CP
1. Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the covers.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.

Cover

490

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

491 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillights, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

2. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove
the bolts.
3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Bolt

4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.

Bulb

Socket
Maintenance

491

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

492 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb

Rear License Plate Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Push the left edge of the lens to the right
and pull out the licence light assembly.

2. Push the tabs to remove the lens.
3. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Tab
Tab

Bulb

Maintenance

Lens

High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.

492

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

493 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.

Lock Tab

Continued

Maintenance

2. Pry on the edge of the lock tab using a flattip screwdriver to push it up.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.

493

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

494 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.

Blade

Top

Retainer
Blade

Maintenance

Tab

Indent

494

5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.

6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

495 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
rear window.

Lock Tab

2. Pry on the edge of the lock tab using a flattip screwdriver to push it up.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.

Maintenance

3. Slide the wiper blade out from the end with
the indent.

Blade

Continued

495

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

496 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and
mount to a new rubber blade.

Retainer

Rubber

5. Slide the wiper blade onto the holder.
u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.

Maintenance

496

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

497 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.

3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.

Maintenance

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

1Checking Tires

2 Wear Indicators P. 502

• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

497

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

498 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example

Tire Labeling
Example

The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

1Tire Sizes

Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)

The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.

Maintenance

Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size

■ Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

498

1Tire and Loading Information Label

Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
225/60 R18 100H
225: Tire width in millimeters.
60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
18: Rim diameter in inches.
100: Load index (a numerical code associated with
the maximum load the tire can carry).
H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

499 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

Maintenance

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

499

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

500 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Maintenance

500

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

501 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.

1Traction

■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

1Temperature

Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Maintenance

501

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

502 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

Maintenance

502

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

503 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.

If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.

Maintenance

503

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

504 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display/
multi-information display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front
Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Maintenance

504

Front

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

505 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.

1Winter Tires

3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1042
6-cylinder models

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain TC2111 MM
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

Maintenance

4-cylinder models

Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.

505

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

506 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Battery
Checking the Battery
Test Indicator Window

Check the battery condition monthly. Look at
the test indicator window and check the
terminals for corrosion.

1Battery

3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 166

• The clock resets.

When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.

2 Setting the Clock P. 88

• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual
Maintenance

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
The test indicator’s color information is on the
battery.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.

506

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

507 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

NOTICE

■ Master Keys with Remote Transmitter *
Screw

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

Battery type: CR1620
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.

Battery

1Replacing the Button Battery

Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.

3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Maintenance

* Not available on all models

Continued

507

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

508 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

■ Smart Entry Remote *
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.

Battery

Maintenance

508

* Not available on all models

2. Remove the upper half by carefully prying
on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

509 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system */
climate control system * deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

509

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

510 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Opening

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

Maintenance

510

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

511 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCleaninguInterior Care

■ Floor Mats

1Floor Mats
Unlock

Lock

The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Maintenance

* Not available on all models

511

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

512 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine
compartment. It can cause a malfunction.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.
Air Intake Vents

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
Maintenance

512

• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

513 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.

■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Maintenance

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

1Applying Wax

513

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

514

514 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

515 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 516
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 517
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 525

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................526
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 527
Jump Starting.................................... 528
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 531

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 532
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On................................................ 534
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 534
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 535
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On ................................................... 536
If the EPS System Indicator Comes On... 536

If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 537
If the TPMS Indicator Comes On ...... 537
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 538
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 541
Emergency Towing........................... 542
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 543
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate .. 544

515

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

516 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools were stored in the cargo area.

Jack

Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Handling the Unexpected

516

Tool Case

Jack Handle Bar

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

517 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.

1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Handling the Unexpected

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model.
Do not use them with another vehicle.
Do not use another type of compact spare tire or
wheel with your vehicle.

Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,
as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

517

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

518 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Handle

Handling the Unexpected

2. Remove the hook from the back of the
cargo floor lid.
Pull the hook to the hole on the side
panel.
3. Take out the removable box.
2 Under-floor Storage Area P. 150

Tool Case

518

1. Push the rear edge of the handle on the
front cargo floor lid and open the lid.

4. Take the jack, extension bar, and wheel
nut wrench out of the tool case.

1Changing a Flat Tire
NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

519 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

5. Remove the cover on the cargo area lining
to access the shaft for the spare tire hoist.

1Changing a Flat Tire
NOTICE

The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is
specially adapted to fit the holder shaft. Do not use
any other tool.

Cover

Handling the Unexpected

6. Attach the short end of the wheel nut
wrench to the spare tire holder shaft.
Turn the wrench to the left to loosen the
shaft.
7. Attach the longer section of the wrench to
the shaft, and turn it until you can see the
spare tire.
u Do not turn the wrench any further
once you feel resistance.
8. Lift up the spare tire holder, then slide the
hook to lift down the holder.
9. Remove the spare tire from the holder.

Wheel Nut Wrench

Spare Tire

Continued

519

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

520 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

10. Place a wheel block or rock in front and
rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

The tire to be replaced.

Handling the Unexpected

520

Wheel
Blocks

11. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side
up) under the vehicle body, near the tire
that needs to be replaced.

12. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

521 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.

3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.

Jack
Handle
Bar

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the
image) clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Continued

521

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

522 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

522

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

523 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Storing the Flat Tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

1. Put the Flat tire in the storage bag provided
with your vehicle.
uThe storage bag is in the tool case.
2. Knot the top of the storage bag.
3. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Always raise the spare tire holder, even if you are not
stowing a tire. If the holder is left down, it will be
damaged during driving and need to be replaced.

Belt
Spare
Tire

Cargo Hook

5. Place the flat tire in the cargo area, and
thread the belt through the cargo hook as
shown.
6. Pass the belt through the ring, and tighten
the belt to secure the flat tire in place.

Handling the Unexpected

4. Bore through the bag, and pass the holding
belt through the hole of the bag and the
wheel of the flat tire as shown.

3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.

Spare Tire Holder
To reinstall the spare tire, place it facing up on the
spare tire holder.
NOTICE

If you store the spare tire face down, it can be
damaged and needs to be replaced.
Continued

523

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

524 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure indicator comes on
while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will go
off and the TPMS indicator comes on, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the low tire pressure or TPMS
indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).

Handling the Unexpected

524

1TPMS and the Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
that it is correct.
Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

525 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch to START (e *1 and check the
starter.

Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 528

Checklist
Models with smart entry

Check for a message on the information display.
● If the NO KEY message appears
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 115

2 Battery P. 506

If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 538
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 420, 422
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
●

The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.

Handling the Unexpected

Check brightness of the interior light.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

2 Immobilizer System P. 107

Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 83
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 541

If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 542
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

525

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

526 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Models with smart entry system

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Handling the Unexpected

526

If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,
and the engine won’t start.
Start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds and the
indicator stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

527 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Models with smart entry system

Emergency Engine Stop
If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button, do
either of the following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button two times.

1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.

The steering wheel will not lock.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF with the shift lever in (P , and to
ACCESSORY with the shift lever in any position other than (P .
Handling the Unexpected

527

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

528 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
4-cylinder models
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
Handling the Unexpected

Booster Battery
6-cylinder models

Booster Battery

528

1Jump Starting

3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

529 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuJump Startingu

4-cylinder models

Continued

1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.

Handling the Unexpected

6-cylinder models

4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
(4-cylinder models)/engine hanger
(6-cylinder models) as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to any
other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

529

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

530 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuJump Startingu

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Handling the Unexpected

530

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

531 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock
1. Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

Slot

All models

Cover

Release
Button

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.

Shift Lock Release Slot

531

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

532 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam is coming out of the engine compartment.

■ First thing to do

Handling the Unexpected

532

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the H mark may damage the engine.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

533 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do

1How to Handle Overheating
MAX

Reserve
Tank

MIN

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down,
contact a dealer for repairs.

3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.

Handling the Unexpected

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the coolant
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

533

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

534 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The light goes out: Start driving again.
u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and
contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

534

* Not available on all models

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system */climate control system *, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

535 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

■ Check Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
Handling the Unexpected

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
535

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

536 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
U.S.

Canada

Handling the Unexpected

536

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
6-cylinder models

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the system
heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,
and limits its performance. The steering wheel
becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated
operation under these conditions can eventually
damage the system.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

537 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On

If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
A tire pressure is significantly low. If the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator stays on for a while, and then goes off after driving a few
miles (kilometers).
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.

1If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

If the TPMS Indicator Comes On
• Comes on when there is a problem with the TPMS.
• If the compact spare is installed, the indicator comes on after driving
for a few miles (kilometers).
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size
tire. The indicator goes off after driving a few miles (kilometers).

Handling the Unexpected

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

537

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

538 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating

Handling the Unexpected

4
5
6

538

* Not available on all models

Circuit Protected
Battery
Battery
Passenger’s Fuse Box
ESP MTR
VSA SFR
VSA Motor
AS F/B OP
Headlight washer *
−
IG Main
−
Passenger Side Light Main
DR F/B STD
Driver Side Light Main
Main Fan
Wiper Motor
Sub Fan
Fan Relay
Rear Defroster
Sub Fan Motor*2

Amps
120 A*3
100 A*2
40 A
70 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
30 A
−
50 A
−
30 A
60 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
7.5 A
40 A
20 A

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Circuit Protected
Hazard
Horn, STOP
−
Trailer
IG Coil
FI Sub
IGI Main 1*3
IGI Main 2*3
Back up
Interior Lights
FI Main
DBW
ACM*3
Heater Motor
MG Clutch

Amps
15 A
20 A
−
15 A
15 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
40 A
7.5 A

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

*2:4-cylinder models
*3:6-cylinder models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

539 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating

■ Interior Fuse Box

Driver side

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
Fuse Box

Passenger side

Driver side

Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label under
the dashboard.

* Not available on all models

Circuit Protected
−
Seat Memory *
Washer
Wiper
ODS
ABS/VSA
−
−
Fuel Pump
VB SOL 2
Meter
ACG
SRS
−
Daytime Running Lights
A/C

Amps
−
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
−
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Label

Located on the lower side panel. Take off
the cover to open.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

539

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

540 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Handling the Unexpected

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32*3
33

Circuit Protected
Accessory, Key, Lock
Accessory
Left Power Seat Sliding
Moonroof
Left Power Seat Reclining
Rear Left Power Window
Front Accessory Power
Socket
Front Left Power Window
Left Door Lock
Front Left Fog Light
Left Small Lights (Exterior)
Left Headlight High Beam
TPMS
Left Headlight Low Beam
−
ST MG DIODE *, *1
Stop *, *2
STRLD *

*1:4-cylinder models
*2:6-cylinder models
*3:Sub fuse box

540

* Not available on all models

Amps
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A

Passenger side

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Circuit Protected
Amps
Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
Right Small Lights (Exterior) 10 A
Front Right Fog Light
10 A
Right Headlight Low Beam 15 A
−
−
Interior Lights
7.5 A
−
−
Right Power Seat Reclining 20 A
Right Power Seat Sliding
20 A
Right Door Lock
10 A
Rear Right Power Window 20 A
SMART *
10 A
Front Right Power Window 20 A
−
−
Audio Amp
20 A
Accessory Power Socket
15 A
(Cargo Area)
−
−
Power Lumbar *
7.5 A
Seat Heaters *
15 A
−
−
−
−
−
−

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

541 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse

Combined Fuse

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 538 to 540.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Puller

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

541

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

542 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
All models

■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle’s weight.
NOTICE

2WD models

■ Wheel lift equipment
Handling the Unexpected

542

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.

Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

543 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
■ What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Pry on the front edge of the cover using a
flat-tip screwdriver to remove the cover.
uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.

1What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.

Cover
Handling the Unexpected

3. Pull the release lever towards you.
u The release lever unlocks and opens the
fuel fill door when it is pulled.

Release Lever

543

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

544 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
■ What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.
1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the
cover on the inside of the tailgate.
uWrap the flap-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratches.

Handling the Unexpected

Cover

2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while sliding the lever to the side using a
flat-tip screwdriver.

Lever

544

1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
What to do-Following up
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

545 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 546
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ... 550

Engine Number and Transmission
Number...................................... 550

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 553
Warranty Coverages ........................ 555
Authorized Manuals......................... 557
Customer Service Information......... 558

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 551
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 552

545

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

546 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Specifications
■ Engine Specifications

4-cylinder models

■ Vehicle Specifications

Displacement

Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)

Crosstour

Spark Plugs

2
3
5

■ Fuel

U.S.: 4,784 lbs (2,170 kg)
Canada: 2,170 kg

■ Battery

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type

Information

546

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

144 cu-in (2,354 cm3)
NGK
ILZKR7B11S
DENSO
SXU22HCR11S
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)

Capacity/Type
U.S.: 2,469 lbs (1,120 kg)
Canada: 1,120 kg
U.S.: 2,381 lbs (1,080 kg)
Canada: 1,080 kg
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1 – 15.9 oz (400 – 450 g)
ND-OIL 8

38AH(5)/47AH(20)
52AH(5)/65AH(20)*1

*1: Canadian models

■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

5.3 US qt (5.0 ℓ)

■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam)
Headlights (High Beam)
Fog Lights
Front Side Marker Lights
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights
Brake/Taillights
Rear Side Marker Lights
Back-Up Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Lights
Cargo Area Light
Interior Lights
Map Lights
Ceiling Light
Vanity Mirror Lights
Glove Box Light
Ambient Light
Courtesy Lights

55W (H11)
60W (HB3)
55W (H11)
5W
24/2.2CP (Amber)
21/5W
3CP
21W
21W (Amber)
LED
5W
5W
8W
8W
1.4W
1.4W
LED
2CP

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

547 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake Fluid
Specified

■ Engine Oil
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)

■ Power Steering Fluid
Specified

Honda Power Steering Fluid

Recommended

Capacity

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ)
Change
including
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
filter

Regular

■ Engine Coolant

Compact
Spare

Specified
Ratio

Wheel Size

Capacity

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.66 US gal (6.3 ℓ)
(change including the remaining 0.18 US gal
(0.68 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
Rear
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

225/65R17 102T

32 (220 [2.2])
32 (220 [2.2])
T155/90D16 110M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 6 1/2J
16 x 4T

Information
Continued

547

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

548 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Engine Specifications

6-cylinder models

■ Vehicle Specifications

Displacement

Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating

Crosstour

Spark Plugs

2
3
5

■ Fuel

U.S.: 4,938 lbs (2,240 kg)*1
5,115 lbs (2,320 kg)*2
Canada: 2,240 kg*1
2,320 kg*2

■ Battery

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Information

548

Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
*1: 2WD models
*2: 4WD models

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

U.S.: 2,381 lbs (1,080 kg)*1
2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)*2
Canada: 1,080 kg*1
1,140 kg*2
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1 – 15.9 oz (400 – 450 g)
ND-OIL 8

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)

Capacity/Type

60AH(5)/72AH(20)

■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

U.S.: 2,623 lbs (1,190 kg)*1
2,668 lbs (1,210 kg)*2
Canada: 1,190 kg*1
1,210 kg*2

212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
NGK
ILZKR7B11
DENSO
SXU22HCR11

5.3 US qt (5.0 ℓ)

55W (H11)
60W (HB3)
55W (H11)
5W
24/2.2CP (Amber)
21/5W
3CP
21W
21W (Amber)
LED
5W
5W
8W
8W
1.4W
1.4W
LED
2CP

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

549 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake Fluid
Specified

■ Engine Oil
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
3.28 US qt (3.1 ℓ)

■ Rear Differential Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda Dual Pump Fluid II
Change
1.3 US qt (1.2 ℓ)

■ Transfer Assembly Fluid
Specified
Capacity

·SAE 90 Viscosity Hypoid Gear Oil
·API Service Classified GL4 or GL5 only
Change
0.43 US qt (0.41 ℓ)

Recommended

Capacity

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
filter

■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio
Capacity

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.92 US gal (7.3 ℓ)
(change including the remaining 0.17 US gal
(0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

Regular

Compact
Spare

Wheel Size

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
Rear
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

225/60R18 100H
33 (230 [2.3])
33 (230 [2.3])
T155/90D16 110M*1
T155/90D17 101M*2
60 (420 [4.2])
18 x 7J
16 x 4T*1
17 x 4T*2

*1: 2WD models
*2: 4WD models

Information

549

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

550 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the
image below for the VIN locations.

Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle’s engine number and
transmission number.
4-cylinder models

Engine Number

Automatic Transmission
Number

Information

Vehicle
Identification
Number
6-cylinder models

Engine Number
Automatic Transmission
Number

550

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number

1Engine Number and Transmission Number
The transmission number is located on the side of the
transmission.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

551 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Smart Entry System
Remote Transmitter
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.

Information

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

551

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

552 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.

552

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

553 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.

1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Information

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

553

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

554 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Information

554

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

555 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Information

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.

Continued

555

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

556 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

Information

556

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

557 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners:
The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can
order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering
other models’ or other years’ manuals.

31TP6C30
HON-R

Form Description
2013 Crosstour L4 Service Manual
2010-2013 Crosstour V6 Service Manual
2010-2012 Model Series Crosstour Body Repair Manual
2013 Crosstour Owner’s Manual
2013 Crosstour Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2013 Crosstour Service History
2013 Crosstour Technology Reference Guide (EX)
2013 Crosstour Technology Reference Guide (EX-L)
2013 Crosstour Technology Reference Guide
(EX/EL-L with Navigation)
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired

Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures
for repair to engine and chassis components. It is
written for the journeyman technician, but it is simple
enough for most mechanically inclined owners to
understand.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
For Canadian Owners:
Si vous avez besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire
de commander le numéro de pièce 33TP6C30

Information

Publication
Form Number
61TY401
61TP603
61TP631
31TP6630
31TP6830
31TP6M30
31TP6A30
31TP6B30

1Authorized Manuals

557

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

558 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009

Information

558

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546

Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P. 550
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

559 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomer Service Informationu

■ Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)

■ Gracenote® END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT

This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,
California (“Gracenote”). The software
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music- related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or

embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.
Continued

Information

Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a
CD, information such as the recording artist
and track name are retrieved from the
Gracenote Database and displayed (when
available).
Gracenote may not contain information for
all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist, album,
and track information from CDs to display
on the HDD.
Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates
a year. More information about Gracenote,
its features, and downloads are available at

www.honda.com (in U.S.) or
www.honda.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000 to present Gracenote.
One or more patents owned by Gracenote
apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list
of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.

559

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

560 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.

Information

The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding
the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories for any

560

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are errorfree or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote

■ Disclaimer of Pandora®
Requirements to access Pandora®
• Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or
iPhone.
• Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com or on your
smartphone)
• Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

561 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Information

Limitations
• Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
• Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
• Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at http://
www.pandora.com . Pandora, the
Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used
with permission.
• Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
• Pandora is only available in the United
States.

561

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

562 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Index
Index
A

Index

562

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 451
Accessories and Modifications ................. 460
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 147
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 478
Engine Oil................................................ 472
Washer.................................................... 483
Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 472
Adjusting
Armrest ................................................... 141
Front Seats .............................................. 133
Head Restraints........................................ 136
Mirrors .................................................... 130
Rear Seats................................................ 139
Steering Wheel ........................................ 129
Aha™................................................. 209, 262
Air Conditioning System (Climate
Control System)....................................... 157
Changing the Mode ........................ 157, 158
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 159
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 509
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ........... 157, 158
Sensors.................................................... 162
Synchronized Mode ................................. 161
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 157
Air Conditioning System (Heating and
Cooling System) ...................................... 154
Cooling ................................................... 156

Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 156
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 509
Heating ................................................... 155
Air Pressure............................... 498, 547, 549
Airbags........................................................ 39
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45
Airbag Care............................................... 53
Event Data Recorder.................................. 24
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 42
Indicator........................................ 50, 73, 79
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 51
Sensors ..................................................... 39
Side Airbag Cutoff System......................... 48
Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 52
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 49
AM/FM Radio............................ 171, 193, 232
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 451
Indicator.................................................... 73
Armrest ..................................................... 141
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 168
Audio System............................................ 164
Adjusting the Sound................ 170, 191, 222
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 165
Error Messages........................................ 268
General Information ................................ 276
HDD........................................................ 242
Internet Radio ................................. 207, 260
iPod®............................................... 203, 252
MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 179, 210, 263

Reactivating ............................................ 166
Recommended CDs ................................ 277
Recommended Devices ........................... 279
Remote Controls..................................... 168
Security Code ......................................... 166
Theft Protection ...................................... 166
Touch Screen .................................. 183, 216
USB Adapter Cable ................................. 165
USB Flash Drives...................................... 280
Authorized Manuals ................................ 557
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 101
Customize ...................................... 298, 309
Automatic Lighting.................................. 120
Automatic Transmission .......................... 425
Creeping................................................. 425
Fluid ....................................................... 480
Kickdown ............................................... 425
Operating the Shift Lever .......... 18, 427, 429
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 531
Shifting........................................... 426, 428
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 165

B
Battery ...................................................... 506
Charging System Indicator ................ 71, 534
Jump Starting ......................................... 528
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 506
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 507
Belts (Seat).................................................. 32
Beverage Holders ..................................... 146

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

563 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Bluetooth® Audio............................. 213, 266
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® .... 320, 332, 367
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 65
Brake System ............................................ 449
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 451
Brake Assist System................................. 452
Fluid ....................................................... 481
Foot Brake .............................................. 450
Indicator ........................................... 70, 536
Parking Brake.......................................... 449
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 125
Bulb Replacement.................................... 484
Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light,
Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear
Side Marker Light................................ 490
Fog Lights ............................................... 486
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light ............... 489
Headlights .............................................. 484
High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 492
Rear License Plate Light........................... 492
Side Marker Lights .................................. 488
Bulb Specifications........................... 546, 548

Controls....................................................... 87
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 478
Adding to the Radiator............................ 479
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 478
Overheating ............................................ 532
Creeping (Automatic Transmission) ........ 425
Cruise Control........................................... 432
Indicator.................................................... 81
Cup Holders .............................................. 146
Customer Service Information................. 558
Customized Features................................ 281

D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 122
Dead Battery............................................. 528
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ......................................... 156, 159
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 551
Dimming
Headlights............................................... 119
Rearview Mirror....................................... 130
Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 473
Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 119
Display Button .................................. 186, 218
Door Mirrors ............................................. 131
Doors........................................................... 91
Auto Door Locking .................................. 101
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 101
Door and Trunk Open Indicator ................. 74
Door Open Indicator.................................. 31

Index

Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 66
Cargo Hook .............................................. 149
Carrying Cargo ................................. 411, 413
CD Player .................................. 173, 200, 239
Center Pocket........................................... 152
Certification Label ................................... 550

Changing Bulbs......................................... 484
Charging System Indicator ................. 71, 534
Child Safety................................................. 54
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 100
Child Seat .................................................... 54
Booster Seats............................................. 65
Child Seat for Infants ................................. 56
Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 57
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 61
Larger Children.......................................... 64
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 56
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 58
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 100
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 512
Cleaning the Interior ................................ 510
Climate Control System ............................ 157
Changing the Mode ................................ 157
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 159
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 509
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 158
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 157
Sensors.................................................... 162
Synchronized Mode ................................. 161
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 157
Clock ............................................................ 88
Coat Hook ................................................. 148
Compact Spare Tire .................. 517, 547, 549
Compass ............................................ 405, 407
Console Compartment ............................. 145

563

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

564 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Keys .......................................................... 91
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside....................................................... 99
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside.................................................... 94
Lockout Prevention System ........................ 98
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 500
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 133
Driving....................................................... 409
Automatic Transmission........................... 425
Braking.................................................... 449
Cruise Control ......................................... 432
Shifting Gear ................................... 426, 428
Starting the Engine .......................... 420, 422
Driving Position Memory System............. 127
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 509

Index

564

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ............................................ 74, 536
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 442
Emergency................................................. 542
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 553
Engine ....................................................... 550
Coolant ................................................... 478
Jump Starting .......................................... 528
Oil ........................................................... 472
Starting ........................................... 420, 422
Switch Buzzer .......................................... 114

Engine Coolant......................................... 478
Adding to the Radiator............................ 479
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 478
Overheating ............................................ 532
Temperature Gauge .................................. 83
Engine Oil ................................................. 472
Adding.................................................... 475
Checking................................................. 473
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 465
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 534
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 472
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 115
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System ............................................... 74, 536
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 66
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 512
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 131

F
Features ....................................................
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................................
Oil...........................................................
Flat Tire .....................................................
Floor Mats.................................................
Fluids
Automatic Transmission ..........................
Brake ......................................................
Engine Coolant .......................................
Windshield Washer .................................

163
509
476
517
511
480
481
478
483

Fog Light Indicator .................................... 79
Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 139
Foot Brake ................................................ 450
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 42
Front Seats................................................ 133
Adjusting ................................................ 133
Fuel ..................................................... 19, 456
Economy................................................. 459
Gauge ...................................................... 83
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72
Recommendation.................................... 456
Refueling ................................................ 456
Fuel Economy ........................................... 459
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 19, 458
Message ................................................. 535
Fuel Fill Door ............................................ 457
Fuses ......................................................... 538
Inspecting and Changing ........................ 541
Locations ........................................ 538, 539

G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 459
Gauge ...................................................... 83
Information............................................. 456
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72
Refueling ................................................ 456
Gauges........................................................ 83
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission .................. 426, 428

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

565 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Glass (care) ............................................... 513
Glove Box ................................................. 144

I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission ......................... 550
Vehicle Identification ............................... 550
Ignition Switch.......................................... 114
Illumination Control ................................. 125
Knob ....................................................... 125
Immobilizer System .................................. 107
Indicator .................................................... 80
Indicators .................................................... 70
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................... 73
Charging System ............................... 71, 534

CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 81, 433
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 81, 432
Door and Trunk Open ............................... 74
Door Open ................................................ 31
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System.. 74, 536
Fog Light................................................... 79
Forward Collision Warning (FCW).............. 76
High Beam ................................................ 79
Immobilizer System ................................... 80
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 77
Lights On .................................................. 79
Low Fuel ................................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure................................ 70, 534
Low Tire Pressure ...................... 75, 446, 447
Maintenance Minder ......................... 81, 465
Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 71, 535
Parking Brake and Brake System........ 70, 536
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 33, 71
Security System Alarm ............................... 80
Side Airbag Off ................................... 52, 79
Smart Entry System ................................... 78
Starter System ........................................... 78
Supplemental Restraint System............ 50, 73
TPMS ................................................ 75, 448
Transmission ............................................. 72
Turn Signal................................................ 78
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System ............................................ 73, 442
VSA® OFF .......................................... 73, 443
Washer Level............................................. 81
Information .............................................. 545

Index

Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 486
Handling the Unexpected ....................... 515
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) .............. 320, 332, 367
Auto Answer .................................. 347, 382
Automatic Import of Cellular
Phonebook and Call History .......... 349, 384
Automatic Transferring ................... 347, 382
Displaying Messages ....................... 362, 401
Editing User Name .................................. 381
HFL Buttons ............................ 320, 332, 367
HFL Menus.............................. 322, 334, 369
HFL Status Display................... 321, 333, 368
Limitations for Manual Operation.... 333, 368
Making a Call ................................. 353, 393
Options During a Call...................... 359, 398
Phone Setup ........................... 324, 339, 373
Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 388
Receiving a Call............................... 358, 397
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ..... 360, 399
Ring Tone ....................................... 348, 383
Selecting a Mail Account................. 361, 400
Speed Dial ...................................... 350, 385
To Create a Security PIN.................. 346, 380
To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail
Options......................................... 344, 378
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio .................. 242

Hazard Warning Button............................... 2
Head Restraints......................................... 136
Headlights................................................. 119
Aiming .................................................... 484
Automatic Operation ............................... 120
Dimming ......................................... 119, 122
Operating ................................................ 119
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 153
Heating and Cooling System ................... 154
Cooling ................................................... 156
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 156
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 509
Heating ................................................... 155
HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ............... 320, 332, 367
High Beam Indicator .................................. 79
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ............ 318

565

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

566 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Key Number Tag ......................................... 92
Keyless Lockout Prevention ....................... 98
Keys ............................................................. 91
Lockout Prevention .................................... 98
Master Keys............................................... 91
Number Tag .............................................. 92
Rear Door Won’t Open ............................ 100
Remote Transmitter ................................... 94
Types and Functions .................................. 91
Valet Key ................................................... 92
Won’t Turn................................................ 22
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ....... 425

LATCH (Child Seats).............................. 59, 62
Lights................................................. 119, 484
Automatic ............................................... 120
Bulb Replacement ................................... 484
Daytime Running Lights........................... 122
Fog Lights ............................................... 122
High Beam Indicator.................................. 79
Interior .................................................... 142
Light Switches ......................................... 119
Lights On Indicator .................................... 79
Turn Signals ............................................ 119
Load Limits................................................ 413
Locking/Unlocking...................................... 91
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 101
Childproof Door Locks............................. 100
From Inside ............................................... 99
From Outside ............................................ 94
Keys .......................................................... 91
Using a Key ............................................... 98
Lockout Prevention System ....................... 98
Low Battery Charge ................................. 534
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 534
Lower Anchors...................................... 59, 62
Lubricant Specifications Chart......... 546, 548
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 413

Lane Departure Warning (LDW).............. 439
LaneWatch™............................................. 444
Language (HFL)......................... 321, 333, 368

Maintenance............................................. 461
Battery .................................................... 506

Information Display.................................... 84
Instrument Panel ........................................ 69
Brightness Control ................................... 125
Interface Dial ............................................ 215
Interior Lights ........................................... 142
Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 130

J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)......................... 521
Jump Starting............................................ 528

Index

566

Brake Fluid.............................................. 481
Cleaning ................................................. 510
Climate Control System .......................... 509
Coolant .................................................. 478
Heating and Cooling System ................... 509
Maintenance Minder™ ........................... 465
Oil .......................................................... 473
Precautions ............................................. 462
Radiator.................................................. 479
Remote Transmitter ................................ 507
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 484
Safety ..................................................... 463
Service Items........................................... 467
Tires........................................................ 497
Transmission Fluid ................................... 480
Under the Hood...................................... 469
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 71, 535
Map Lights................................................ 143
Maximum Load Limit............................... 413
Meters, Gauges .......................................... 83
Mirrors ...................................................... 130
Adjusting ................................................ 130
Door ....................................................... 131
Exterior ................................................... 131
Interior Rearview ..................................... 130
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 460
Moonroof ................................................. 113
MP3................... 173, 179, 200, 210, 239, 263
Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 455

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

567 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

N
Numbers (Identification) ......................... 550

O
Odometer ................................................... 84
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 472
Adding ................................................... 475
Checking ................................................ 473
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 465
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 534
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 472
Viscosity.................................................. 472
Opening/Closing
Hood ...................................................... 471
Moonroof ............................................... 113
Power Windows...................................... 110
Tailgate................................................... 105
Outside Temperature ................................ 86
Adjusting .................................................. 86
Overheating ............................................. 532

R
Radiator .................................................... 479
Radio (AM/FM).......................... 171, 193, 232
Radio (XM®) ...................................... 197, 236
Radio Data System (RDS).......... 172, 195, 234
RDS (Radio Data System).......... 172, 195, 234
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 553
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 126
Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 139
Rearview Mirror........................................ 130
Refueling................................................... 456
Fuel Gauge ................................................ 83
Gasoline .................................. 456, 546, 548
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Regulations ............................... 447, 500, 551
Remote Transmitter ................................... 94
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 507
Bulbs ....................................................... 484

Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 493
Fuses............................................... 538, 539
Rear Wiper Blade Rubber......................... 495
Tires ........................................................ 503
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 552
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 85

S
Safe Driving ................................................ 27
Safety Check ............................................... 31
Safety Labels............................................... 67
Safety Message........................................... 25
Seat Belts .................................................... 32
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 36
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 34
Checking................................................... 38
Fastening .................................................. 35
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 61
Pregnant Women ...................................... 37
Reminder .................................................. 33
Warning Indicator ............................... 33, 71
Seat Heaters.............................................. 153
Seats .......................................................... 133
Adjusting ................................................ 133
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 133
Front Seats .............................................. 133
Rear Seats ............................................... 139
Seat Heaters............................................ 153

Index

Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift
Mode) ..................................................... 430
Pandora® .......................................... 208, 261
Panic Mode............................................... 109
Parking ..................................................... 453
Parking Brake........................................... 449

Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ............................................ 70, 536
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 51
Passing Indicators ..................................... 119
Power Windows........................................ 110
Precautions While Driving ....................... 424
Rain......................................................... 424
Pregnant Women ....................................... 37
Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 517

567

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

Index

568

568 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Security System ......................................... 107
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 80
Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 80
Select Lever ................................. 18, 426, 428
Operation .................................. 18, 427, 429
Releasing ................................................. 531
Won’t Move ............................................ 531
Select/Reset Knob ....................................... 84
Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 58
Selector Knob (Audio) ...................... 169, 182
Sequential Shift Mode.............................. 430
Setting the Clock ........................................ 88
Shift Lever ................................... 18, 426, 428
Shift Lever Position Indicator........... 427, 429
Shifting (Transmission) ..................... 426, 428
Shoulder Anchor......................................... 36
Side Airbags ................................................ 46
Cutoff System............................................ 48
Off Indicator .............................................. 48
Side Curtain Airbags................................... 49
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System........................................................ 96
Snow Tires ................................................. 505
Spare Tire .................................. 517, 547, 549
Spark Plugs........................................ 546, 548
Specifications ............................................ 546
Specified Fuel............................ 456, 546, 548
Speedometer............................................... 83
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 42
Starting the Engine .......................... 420, 422
Does Not Start ......................................... 525

Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 114
Jump Starting.......................................... 528
Steering Wheel......................................... 129
Adjusting ................................................ 129
Stopping ................................................... 453
Summer Tires ............................................ 505
Sunglasses Holder..................................... 152
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 42
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel)............................................. 2, 3, 114
Synchronized Mode ................................. 161

T
Tachometer................................................. 83
Tailgate ..................................................... 105
Unable to Open....................................... 544
Temperature Gauge................................... 83
Temperature Sensor................................. 162
Time (Setting) ............................................. 88
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 446
Indicator............................................ 75, 537
Tires........................................................... 497
Air Pressure ............................. 498, 547, 549
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 497
Inspection ............................................... 497
Labeling .................................................. 498
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 517
Regulations ............................................. 500
Rotation .................................................. 504

Spare Tire ............................... 517, 547, 549
Summer.................................................. 505
Tire Chains.............................................. 505
Wear Indicators....................................... 502
Winter .................................................... 505
Tools ......................................................... 516
Towing a Trailer....................................... 415
Equipment and Accessories..................... 416
Load Limits ............................................. 415
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 419
Emergency.............................................. 542
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 446
Indicator ........................................... 75, 537
Transmission..................................... 426, 428
Automatic....................................... 426, 428
Fluid ....................................................... 480
Number .................................................. 550
Shift Lever Position Indicator ........... 427, 429
Trip Meter .................................................. 85
Troubleshooting ...................................... 515
Blown Fuse ..................................... 538, 539
Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 22
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 23
Emergency Towing ................................. 542
Engine Won’t Start ................................. 525
Noise When Braking ................................. 23
Overheating............................................ 532
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 517
Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 22, 100
Select Lever Won’t Move ........................ 531

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book

569 ページ

２０１２年９月２７日 木曜日 午後３時２７分

Warning Indicators.................................... 70
Trunk
Light Bulb ....................................... 546, 548
Turn Signals.............................................. 119
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 78

U
Unlocking the Doors.................................. 94
USB Adapter Cable .......................... 164, 165
USB Flash Drives ....................................... 280
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button
Start System.............................................. 96

Index

Valet Key .................................................... 92
Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 5
Vehicle Identification Number................ 550
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) ................. 442
Off Button .............................................. 443
Off Indicator ............................................. 73
System Indicator ....................................... 73
Ventilation ............................................... 158
Viscosity (Oil)............................ 472, 547, 549
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 442

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately)............................................... 555
Watts ................................................. 546, 548
Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 502
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 521
Window Washers...................................... 123
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 483
Switch ..................................................... 123
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 110
Windshield ................................................ 123
Cleaning.................................................. 513
Defrosting/Defogging ...................... 156, 159
Washer Fluid ........................................... 483
Wiper Blades ........................................... 493
Wipers and Washers ................................ 123
Winter Tires .............................................. 505
Snow Tires............................................... 505
Tire Chains .............................................. 505
Wipers and Washers ................................. 123
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 493
Front ....................................................... 123
Rear ........................................................ 124
WMA ................. 173, 179, 200, 210, 239, 263
Worn Tires................................................. 497

XM® Radio......................................... 197, 236

Warning and Information Messages ........ 82
Warning Indicator On/Blinking............... 534
Warning Labels .......................................... 67

569

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2013:10:08 15:32:19-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:10:08 15:32:19-07:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Metadata Date                   : 2013:10:08 15:32:19-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:de7aab87-8ac2-478c-8068-6e92117c1cca
Instance ID                     : uuid:3e5844c6-caf2-4dba-9ef1-e07eed19bb94
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 571

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Honda 2013 Crosstour Owners Manual

Honda-2013-Crosstour-Unlinked-Owners-Manual-106992 honda-2013-crosstour-unlinked-owners-manual-106992

Owners Manual Pdf P61313 2013 Honda Crosstour Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation